turbo wave

Transcription

turbo wave

Functional Description User Interface
TURBO WAVE
Art.-No.:
10014025
Issue:
V7.1 (08/20004)
Imprint
All trademarks are the acknowledged property of their owners.
Though appropriate care has been used in compiling this User Manual, errors and omissions cannot be ruled out completely due to continuously ongoing development.
Because of technical developments, HOMMELWERKE GmbH retains
the right to make technical changes without obligation of notification.
No liability will be accepted in the event of damage resulting from noncompliance with the information contained herein.
No part of this User Manual may be reproduced in any way (by print,
photocopying, microfilm or any other technique), nor may it be processed, duplicated or disseminated with the help of electronic systems
without prior written consent of the HOMMELWERKE GmbH.
Issue: 16. August 2004
HOMMELWERKE GmbH
Alte Tuttlinger Str. 20
D-77056 VS-Schwenningen
Tel.
+ 49 7720/ 602 - 0
Fax
+ 49 7720/ 602 - 123
e-mail:
II
[email protected]
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Table of contents
Document-ID 10014025
Table of contents
1
Basic principles ....................................................................... 1-1
1.1
1.1.1
Guarantee ..................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2
Scanning system........................................................... 1-1
1.1.3
CNC operation .............................................................. 1-2
1.2
Measuring station.............................................................. 1-3
1.2.1
Standard application ..................................................... 1-3
1.2.2
Environmental conditions .............................................. 1-3
1.3
General information about TURBO WAVE...................... 1-4
1.3.1
Important notes ............................................................. 1-4
1.3.2
Image-CD...................................................................... 1-4
1.3.3
Program start ................................................................ 1-4
1.3.4
Scope of performance................................................... 1-5
1.3.5
User rights..................................................................... 1-7
1.3.6
Navigation ..................................................................... 1-8
1.4
Program start ................................................................... 1-11
1.4.1
General ....................................................................... 1-11
1.4.2
Menu overview ............................................................ 1-12
1.4.3
Import measuring programs ........................................ 1-13
1.5
2
Safety notes ....................................................................... 1-1
Data exchange format ..................................................... 1-17
Setup menu .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1
Introduction ....................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Measuring station configuration ...................................... 2-1
2.2.1
Introduction ................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2
Other components......................................................... 2-7
2.3
Probe configuration ........................................................ 2-14
2.3.1
Introduction ................................................................. 2-14
2.3.2
Select probe and probe arm........................................ 2-14
2.3.3
Edit probe data............................................................ 2-15
2.4
Password settings........................................................... 2-19
2.4.1
Introduction ................................................................. 2-19
2.4.2
Change password ....................................................... 2-20
2.4.3
Password prompt ........................................................ 2-21
2.5
Defaults ............................................................................ 2-21
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
III
Table of contents
3
Create measuring program...................................................... 3-1
3.1
Introduction........................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1
Parts of the measuring program .................................... 3-1
3.1.2
Opening the 'Create measuring program' mode ............ 3-2
3.1.3
General work steps ....................................................... 3-3
3.1.4
Menu overview .............................................................. 3-3
3.2
Design report - general...................................................... 3-8
3.2.1
Insert frame ................................................................... 3-9
3.2.2
Measuring documentation ............................................. 3-9
3.2.3
Company header ......................................................... 3-12
3.2.4
Text object................................................................... 3-14
3.2.5
Date and files object.................................................... 3-15
3.2.6
Compile report header................................................. 3-16
3.3
Parameters Roughness measurement ........................... 3-17
3.3.1
Introduction ................................................................. 3-17
3.3.2
Settings Parameters.................................................... 3-17
3.3.3
Form object parameters .............................................. 3-22
3.3.4
TURBO CONTOUR parameters.................................. 3-23
3.4
Measuring conditions...................................................... 3-24
3.4.1
General ....................................................................... 3-24
3.4.2
Defining measuring conditions..................................... 3-27
3.4.3
Form object measuring conditions............................... 3-34
3.5
Profile diagrams............................................................... 3-34
3.5.1
Introduction ................................................................. 3-34
3.5.2
Profile graphic form object........................................... 3-35
3.5.3
Form object material ratio curve and frequency........... 3-38
3.6
Measured value statistics ............................................... 3-40
3.6.1
Introduction ................................................................. 3-40
3.6.2
Form object Parameter list .......................................... 3-41
3.6.3
Table of parameters form ............................................ 3-42
3.6.4
Statistics form object (list) ........................................... 3-45
3.7
Export functions .............................................................. 3-46
3.7.1
3.8
IV
Export QS-STAT ......................................................... 3-46
Program sequence........................................................... 3-48
3.8.1
Program sequence settings......................................... 3-49
3.8.2
Program sequence roughness evaluations.................. 3-53
3.8.3
Program sequence contour evaluation ........................ 3-59
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Table of contents
3.8.4
3.9
4
Special functions ......................................................... 3-61
Documenting and archiving measuring results ............ 3-62
3.9.1
Printout form ............................................................... 3-62
3.9.2
Multiprint ..................................................................... 3-64
3.9.3
Saving a measuring program ...................................... 3-68
3.9.4
Deleting a measuring program .................................... 3-69
3.9.5
Exiting the "Create measuring program" mode ........... 3-69
Adjustment and measuring ..................................................... 4-1
4.1
User levels ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1
General ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2
Start program ................................................................ 4-3
4.1.3
Operating functions in the Measure + Evaluate mode ... 4-5
4.2
Reference run .................................................................... 4-9
4.2.1
Open the adjustment window ........................................ 4-9
4.2.2
Automatic reference run................................................ 4-9
4.2.3
Manual reference run .................................................. 4-10
4.3
Adjustment functions...................................................... 4-11
4.3.1
4.4
Adjustment window ..................................................... 4-11
Axis positioning............................................................... 4-14
4.4.1
Operating variants....................................................... 4-14
4.4.2
Positioning speeds ...................................................... 4-15
4.4.3
Display probe position ................................................. 4-16
4.4.4
Probe protection function ............................................ 4-16
4.4.5
Zero probe residual value............................................ 4-17
4.5
wavesystem components ............................................... 4-17
4.5.1
Introduction ................................................................. 4-17
4.5.2
Settings wavesystem................................................... 4-18
4.6
Measuring run adjustment .............................................. 4-23
4.6.1
General ....................................................................... 4-23
4.6.2
Align profile ................................................................. 4-25
4.6.3
Remove profile offset .................................................. 4-27
4.7
Measuring run.................................................................. 4-28
4.7.1
Start measuring run..................................................... 4-28
4.7.2
Exit measurement ....................................................... 4-29
4.7.3
Save profile ................................................................. 4-29
4.7.4
Abort measuring run (emergency stop) ....................... 4-29
4.7.5
Adapt measuring conditions ........................................ 4-30
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
V
Table of contents
4.8
Profile export.................................................................... 4-30
4.8.1
Export QS-STAT ......................................................... 4-30
4.8.2
Export / Import ASCII profile....................................... 4-32
4.8.3
Export / Import Smd profile.......................................... 4-32
4.9
Re-compute profile .......................................................... 4-32
4.9.1
General ....................................................................... 4-32
4.9.2
Re-compute................................................................. 4-32
4.10 Delete measurements...................................................... 4-33
4.11 Print measurement results.............................................. 4-34
4.11.1
Printout form ............................................................ 4-34
4.11.2
Screen form ............................................................. 4-34
4.11.3
Multiprint .................................................................. 4-34
4.12 Close measuring program............................................... 4-35
5
Roughness profile evaluation ................................................. 5-1
5.1
5.1.1
Introduction ................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2
General functions .......................................................... 5-5
5.1.3
Aligning the profile......................................................... 5-7
5.1.4
Extracting profile segments ........................................... 5-8
5.1.5
Calculations on the profile ........................................... 5-10
5.1.6
Exit profile analysis...................................................... 5-12
5.2
6
Profile analysis .................................................................. 5-1
Fourier analysis ............................................................... 5-13
5.2.1
Introduction ................................................................. 5-13
5.2.2
Run Fourier analysis.................................................... 5-17
5.2.3
Tapered function ......................................................... 5-19
5.2.4
Exit Fourier analysis .................................................... 5-21
Contour profile evaluation..................................................... 6-22
6.1
Introduction...................................................................... 6-22
6.1.1
Scope of performance ................................................. 6-22
6.1.2
Evaluation window....................................................... 6-22
6.1.3
Opening the evaluation window ................................... 6-23
6.1.4
Menu overview ............................................................ 6-23
6.1.5
Zoom functions............................................................ 6-27
6.2
Functions in the evaluation window .............................. 6-28
6.2.1
6.3
Profile functions .............................................................. 6-34
6.3.1
VI
General settings .......................................................... 6-28
Adapting the profile position ........................................ 6-34
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Table of contents
6.3.2
6.4
Import/export DXF profile ............................................ 6-38
6.4.2
Beading evaluation...................................................... 6-39
Creating elements ........................................................... 6-43
6.5.1
Introduction ................................................................. 6-43
6.5.2
General element functions .......................................... 6-43
6.5.3
Point functions ............................................................ 6-47
6.5.4
Line functions.............................................................. 6-51
6.5.5
Calculated elements (fits)............................................ 6-56
6.5.6
Compare profiles......................................................... 6-70
6.6
Calculating characteristics ............................................. 6-76
6.6.1
Introduction ................................................................. 6-76
6.6.2
Computing distances................................................... 6-79
6.6.3
Computing radii ........................................................... 6-80
6.6.4
Calculating angles....................................................... 6-82
6.6.5
Display profile form deviation ...................................... 6-84
6.6.6
Evaluate workpiece edges .......................................... 6-86
6.7
Auto-evaluation................................................................ 6-89
6.7.1
General ....................................................................... 6-89
6.7.2
Work steps.................................................................. 6-90
6.8
Exit contour evaluation ................................................... 6-93
6.8.1
Exit contour evaluation window ................................... 6-93
6.8.2
Save contour evaluation.............................................. 6-93
6.8.3
Print results ................................................................. 6-93
Evaluation of topography........................................................ 7-1
7.1
8
Special functions............................................................. 6-38
6.4.1
6.5
7
Change profile form .................................................... 6-36
Introduction ....................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1
Settings......................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2
Performing the adjustment ............................................ 7-3
7.1.3
Making the topography measurement ........................... 7-4
7.1.4
Start topographical evaluation ....................................... 7-4
Measurement position management ...................................... 8-1
8.1
Introduction ....................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1
Philosophy .................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2
Measurement position plan ........................................... 8-2
8.2
Objects ............................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1
General ......................................................................... 8-3
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
VII
Table of contents
9
8.2.2
Measuring conditions..................................................... 8-3
8.2.3
Parameters.................................................................... 8-4
8.2.4
Program sequence ........................................................ 8-4
8.2.5
Data export.................................................................... 8-4
8.2.6
Measurement positions ................................................. 8-4
CNC run (optional) ................................................................... 9-1
9.1
General ............................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1
Activating the CNC editor .............................................. 9-1
9.1.2
Programming the CNC run ............................................ 9-2
9.2
Functional description of the CNC commands ............... 9-2
9.2.1
Run functions ................................................................ 9-2
9.2.2
Positioning..................................................................... 9-7
9.2.3
Align, Adjustment ........................................................ 9-11
9.2.4
Measuring conditions, measurement, evaluation ......... 9-12
9.2.5
Display, outputs/exports, save..................................... 9-15
9.2.6
Topography, contour ................................................... 9-21
9.3
Determining zero offset................................................... 9-23
9.3.1
General ....................................................................... 9-23
9.3.2
Determining master co-ordinates................................. 9-24
9.3.3
Checking the probe position/Determining the zero offset9-24
9.3.4
Special commands ...................................................... 9-25
10 Compensation and calibration .............................................. 10-1
10.1 Description of compensation.......................................... 10-1
10.1.1
General .................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2
Definition of terms on the probe ............................... 10-2
10.1.3
Arc error ................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4
Stylus tip radius........................................................ 10-3
10.1.5
Probe sensitivity (gain factor) ................................... 10-5
10.1.6
Stylus tip height........................................................ 10-5
10.1.7
Probe signal linearisation ......................................... 10-5
10.2 Calibrate the scanning system ....................................... 10-8
VIII
10.2.1
Introduction .............................................................. 10-8
10.2.2
Preparation of the measuring system....................... 10-8
10.2.3
Preparations in TURBO WAVE .............................. 10-10
10.2.4
Determination of gain factor ................................... 10-14
10.2.5
Determination of the stylus tip height ..................... 10-18
10.2.6
Probe linearisation.................................................. 10-21
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Table of contents
11 Roughness measuring .......................................................... 11-1
11.1 Introduction to scanning systems.................................. 11-1
11.1.1
Probe principle ......................................................... 11-1
11.1.2
Probe identification .................................................. 11-2
11.1.3
Overview of scanning systems................................. 11-2
11.2 Definitions of surface roughness................................... 11-3
11.2.1
Surface profile element ............................................ 11-3
11.2.2
Definitions on roughness profile............................... 11-3
11.3 Surface parameters ......................................................... 11-5
11.3.1
Group 1 (Pt, Wt, Rt, Rz, R3z, Ra, RPc) ................... 11-5
11.3.2
Group 2 (Rq, R∆q, Rsk, Rku, RSm, PSm, WSm) .. 11-8
11.3.3
Group 3 (material parameters)............................... 11-11
12 Troubleshooting / Maintenance ............................................ 12-1
12.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................. 12-1
12.2 Maintenance / Care.......................................................... 12-2
13 Index ....................................................................................... 13-1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
IX
Safety notes
1 Basic principles
1.1 Safety notes
1.1.1 Guarantee
The following instructions must be followed in order to retain
your guarantee rights:
ATTENTION!
The configuration of the used PC is agreed with and tested carefully by
Hommelwerke. Any changes made by the customer (e.g. component replacement, connection of additional peripheral equipment, installation of
additional software) can affect the functional reliability!
No screen saver may be activated on the evaluation computer!
Changes in the configuration must be checked and released by
Hommelwerke!
1.1.2 Scanning system
It is imperative to observe the following safety instructions to
avoid damaging the measuring and scanning system!
ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the respective travel paths are collision-free during movement of the axes!
The speed of the manual axes movements (wavelift, waveline, wavetilt
and wavemove) must always be adapted to the current distance between
probe and workpiece under additional consideration of the mechanical
probe stroke. The greater this distance and the probe stroke, the higher
the speed may be. The probe and workpiece must be monitored continuously for this. When the probe approaches the workpiece, the speed
must be reduced to level 2.
The scanning system must be moved to a collision-free position before
the workpiece is moved, removed or changed to avoid damaging the
probe with these actions.
The new probe must be defined correctly in the software when the
probes are changed. You must check whether the right probe is selected
at the right measurement position. Make sure that a scanning signal is
available before moving the axis.
Note
On workpieces with different heights along the measuring line as well as
angled position of the workpiece, make sure that the greatest difference
in height does not exceed the max. mechanical probe stroke during the
measuring cycle.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-1
Basic principles
wavecontour
On difficult workpiece surfaces (e.g. groove with steep and/or high
flanks) attention must be paid to an adequately horizontal and vertical
mobility of the wavecontour probe arm. Depending on the stylus geometry and material the probe may otherwise be damaged when it sticks in
the workpiece.
AUTOZERO
function
AUTOZERO function with carbide styluses (wavecontour):
For workpiece geometries with steep flanks no Autostop may be used
because the stylus may jam in the material and be damaged.
stylus tip
workpiece
movement of the
stylus tip at Auto-stop
AUTOZERO function with white light sensor
With a white light sensor this function should only be used after manual trial measurements. Otherwise the sensor may not detect the surface correctly and will collide and be damaged in the case of unfavourable settings (e.g. dark workpiece surface with short exposure
time)!
wavecontour
surfscan
without
automatic
Probe lift
Make sure that axes can move freely before performing the "Reverse
traverse unit"!
1.1.3 CNC operation
All the safety notes listed above apply equally in CNC operation. The
following additional notes must be observed:
Note
The workpiece must always be inserted correctly (in the device)
to allow undisturbed and accurate CNC axis movements.
The last start up position must always be a collision-free rest position.
1-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Measuring station
1.2 Measuring station
1.2.1 Standard application
A complete measuring system using TURBO WAVE includes the
evaluation unit (HOMMEL TESTER T8000, measuring electronics integrated in the PC) and the measuring station with its individual components.
Both roughness and contour probes can be connected to the waveline
traverse unit. One measuring station can then be used alternately for
roughness or contour measurements.
Figure 1-1: Example hardware configuration surface measuring station T8000 CAN
1.2.2 Environmental conditions
The following general environmental and operating conditions must be
observed for the measuring station:
•
permissible temperature range: +10°C to +40°C
•
relative humidity: max. 85% without condensation
•
The cleaner and more stable the environmental conditions are, the more
reliably the HOMMEL TESTER with the connected measuring station will
work.
•
Workpieces should have room temperature and must, above all, be free
from chips, dirt, oil, grease and resin because these cause measuring errors!
•
The installation site must be vibration-free, as any vibration will interfere
with measuring data recording. Any vibration due to shock must be
avoided during operation.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-3
Basic principles
1.3 General information about TURBO
WAVE
1.3.1 Important notes
The TURBO WAVE software is initially installed on the measuring station
by HOMMELWERKE.
The software may only be updated by HOMMELWERKE Service!
The scope of delivery includes an Image-CD with Norton Ghost which
you need to initiate the as-delivered state of the software including the
operating system.
You can copy a current image file to a CD at regular intervals and then
keep this as a backup. This saves all the programs and data which
have been added since delivery or since the last backup. In the event
of a system error it is often easier to copy back this image file than to
correctly assign externally conventionally saved files. The evaluation
computers are equipped with a CD burner as a CD drive which enables comfortable creation of the image files.
Save your measuring programs and all the measuring results regularly
all the same to avoid data loss!
1.3.2 Image-CD
The CD provided contains image files as a reflection of the asdelivered state of the computer and thus all the information required
for creating a completely new data medium or a partition. The image
file is duplicated onto a partition of a data medium and replaces all existing data.
The evaluation computer can be booted from the CD drive in the asdelivered state so that the image CD can be used to restore the operating system and as-delivered state quickly and easily at any time.
The Norton Ghost software required for creating and using the image
CD is also on the image CD and is not installed separately on the
computer.
The original CD of the TURBO WAVE software is also included in the
scope of delivery for license reasons but the customer does not need
it.
Note
All the information for using the Image-CD with Norton Ghost can be
found in the operating manual (Art. No. 526238) which comes with this
CD.
1.3.3 Program start
Start the TURBO WAVE software by double clicking the program icon
on the desktop or by opening the Start menu.
1-4
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
General information about TURBO WAVE
The title screen and the user interface of TURBO WAVE with the main
menu then appear on the monitor.
You can access all the program functions from the main menu.
The TURBO WAVE software is protected by a dongle against unauthorised use.
Note
Before you start the software, it will be essential to plug the dongle
provided into the parallel interface of your PC.
1.3.4 Scope of performance
The TURBO WAVE software allows you to perform complex measurement tasks with accurate evaluation of micro and macro contours.
The software can use both roughness probes and contour probes and
is therefore very versatile.
1.3.4.1 Performance scope for roughness measurement
The roughness profile (R profile) and the waviness profile (W profile)
are determined from the unfiltered primary profile (P profile) by profile
filtering in accordance with DIN EN ISO 11562.
Parameters are defined for the three profiles which are indicated by
the respective capital letters P, R, or W.
Following DIN EN ISO 4287 all parameter definitions are valid for the
roughness profile as well as for the primary and waviness profiles.
Please consult the Hommelwerke leaflet “Surface parameters and
measuring conditions” or the latest technical information notices for
detailed information!
Technical data roughness measurement and evaluation:
Category
Details
Profiles
P, R, W and K profile, profiles WD1 and WD2
Surface parameters
and functions
DIN EN ISO 4287: roughness parameters, profile parameters, waviness parameters
DIN EN ISO 13565: core roughness parameters
DIN EN ISO 12085: motif parameters
JIS B - 0601: roughness parameters
Statistics
per measuring program from 1 to 999 measurements
of all measuring variables with subsequent statistical
evaluation n, x, S, R, (calculation of mean value,
standard deviation, maximum and minimum value)
Measuring ranges /
resolution
depending on the probe used:
± 8 µm / 1 nm
± 80 µm / 10 nm
± 800 µm / 100 nm
± 8000 µm / 1000 nm
Unit
metric/inch - µm/µ" (µInch), switchable
Filter
Cut-offs:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-5
Basic principles
Category
Details
0.025; 0.08; 0.25; 2.5; 8 (mm), selectable in -2 to +1
cut-off steps
variable from 0.001 to 80 in steps of 0.001
DIN 4768 (1974):
RC analogue filter (digitally calculated, [mm]) with
standard cut-off steps as well as variably adjustable
cut-offs (0.025; 0.08; 0.25; 2.5; 8)
DIN EN ISO 11562 bzw. DIN 4777 (alt):
Gauss 50% (M1 ) digital filter in [mm ] with standard
cut-off steps as well as variably adjustable cut-offs
(0.025; 0.08; 0.25; 2.5; 8)
DIN EN ISO 13565-1:
double Gauss (M2) for evaluating the parameters of
the material ratio curve (Rk parameter) with variably
adjustable cut-offs (0.025; 0.08; 0.25; 2.5; 8)
ISO 3274/11562:
short-wave cut-off λs; λc/λs selectable in steps
(30, 100, 300)
and form filter λf
sampling lengths lm
0.40 / 1.25 / 4.0 / 12.5 / 40 mm
or variably selectable
traverse lengths lt
0.48 / 1.5 / 4.8 / 15 / 48 mm
or variably selectable from 0.1 to 200 mm
traverse speed vt
0.05 / 0.15 / 0.5 mm/s (assigned to lt)
or variably selectable from 0.01 to 2.0
(in steps of 0.01)
Cut-off λ
0.08 / 0.28 / 0.8 / 2.5 / 8 mm
Operating modes:
Program creation, CNC run (option)
Measuring run automatic with preselected measuring
programs
Profile measurement, Profile analysis, Calibration
Align
Profile reversal, rough alignment, fine alignment, partial alignment
Screen and print
outputs
Freely definable outputs: surface parameters, statistics, profile graphics, material ratio, measuring conditions, tolerances, topography (option)
User languages
German, English, French, Spanish, Czech, Italian,
Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian, others on request
1.3.4.2 Performance scope of contour evaluation
The TURBO CONTOUR program section of TURBO WAVE serves for
contour evaluation of micro and macro contours. Geometric features
are determined directly by function elements.
1-6
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Technical data of contour measurement and evaluation:
Category
Details
traverse lengths
60 / 120 / 200 mm
traverse speed vt
0.02 to 3.0mm/s
Positioning speed
to 5.0 mm/s
Compensations
Stylus radius, arc error, linearity
Magnification
vertical/horizontal: 0.1 to 1000 times, manual and
automatic; variable by zoom function
Evaluation
point, straight line, radius, angle, min-max functions,
any distances, radii comparison, aligning, base formation, profile fit, convexity measurement, statistics; auto evaluation
You will find detailed information about this in chapter Contour profile evaluation.
Dimension system
metric/inch (switchable)
Archiving / reports
Load and save profile/result file; printout form,
screen form, profile graphic from evaluation window, drawing form;
User languages
German, English, French, Spanish, Czech, Italian,
Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian, others on request
1.3.5 User rights
The TURBO WAVE software manages a total of three user levels
(modes) with different functional scopes.
A password can be set for level I or II in the Setup menu to control access rights.
Different functions are available (see table) depending on the respective active level. Menu and toolbars are adapted accordingly
to this scope of functions.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-7
Basic principles
Level I
Create measuring program/Measure/Evaluate:
= complete scope of functions of TURBO WAVE
•
Create new measuring programs, adapt and optimise
•
Password protection possible
•
contains the full scope of functions of level II
Level II
Measure/Evaluate:
•
Measure
•
Analyse existing profiles and parameters
•
Fourier analysis (optional)
•
Password protection possible
•
All level III functions possible
Level III
Measure:
•
Conduct measurements with an existing measuring program
•
Print measuring reports
•
Change measuring conditions (only temporarily)
Level III is designed primarily for using the HOMMEL TESTER
T8000 with TURBO WAVE in production.
Access to the particular levels:
•
by mouseclick on the buttons F5, F6 or F7 of the function key bar
•
by selecting the menu Options, Mode....
or
1.3.6 Navigation
1.3.6.1 General
The TURBO WAVE software is based on the well-know user interface of the Windows operating system. All the terminology used is
based on the Microsoft language. Commonly used shortcuts and editing operations (cut-and-paste and copy-and-paste via the clipboard,
drag & drop etc.) are identical.
All functions and menu commands can be activated with the mouse or
keyboard.
The TURBO WAVE can also be operated by the PC keyboard because key combinations (shortcuts, e.g. Ctrl+A) are specified in the
menus for most menu items and commands. Otherwise use the key
combination ALT+underscored initial letter of the desired menu
(hotkey). Then use the cursor keys to move to the command you want
to execute. Press the Enter key ↵ to confirm your selection.
1-8
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
1.3.6.2 Screen layout
The TURBO WAVE user interface contains the following elements:
2
3
1
4
5
Figure 1-2: Screen layout
1
Function key bar:
2
Menu bar
3
Title bar
4
Program workspace with report elements
5
Status bar
Title bar:
The title bar shows the program name TURBO WAVE and the current
version as well as the name of the currently selected measuring program.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-9
Basic principles
Menu bar:
All commands are grouped thematically in the menus. The menu
commands are selected by a mouseclick or with the keyboard (shortcuts and hotkeys).
The commands available to select from the menu bar vary depending
on the selected program mode.
In the menus, various menu items can be activated or deactivated
by clicking. If the relevant commands are active, this is displayed by a
prefixed checkmark. Click on the option again to deselect it.
Toolbar:
The toolbar contains up to 12 buttons which are identified by appropriate icons if occupied by program functions. Tool tips which appear
when pointing with the mouse allow easier detection.
The allocation of the function keys varies, depending on the selected
program mode (Measure, Measure + Evaluate or Create measuring
program). Refer to the relevant sections of this manual for more details.
Program workspace/screen form:
This space is initially empty in the main menu .
The user can create a new (empty) measuring program (menu Measuring program => New). The software then changes automatically to
the Create measuring program mode (F7).
With the Measuring program => Open menu an existing measuring
program is opened with the screen form. The software then selects the
most recently set user level to display the measuring program.
The individual elements in the screen form can be changed in size and
their positions moved like the graphics with the left mouse button
pressed. A grid helps you to arrange them.
Status bar:
The status bar gives the user context-related information about the
command inputs being made at the time. The currently active program
mode (user level) is displayed at the bottom right.
1.3.6.3 Dialog elements
The elements contained in the dialog boxes fulfil the following functions:
1-10
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program start
1
5
4
2
Figure 1-3: Example dialog box
Pos
.
Designation
Functionality
1
Option button
Only one of several options or functions can be
selected or active.
2
Input topic
(e.g. probe type)
Input topics contain various dialog elements under
a certain topic with an appropriate header.
3
Checkbox
Checkboxes are used to show whether the stated
function is active or not:
4
Drop-down
menu
The drop-down menus contain a list of the options
available for selection. Only one entry can be selected.
5
Text box:
Text boxes are provided for the free entry of texts
and numbers. They may be pre-formatted for the
inputs they expect.
Decimal points must always be entered as points, never as commas.
Tabs:
The sub-menus contain so-called labelled tabs. A mouseclick on these
labels activates the desired tabs and displays them in the foreground
for editing.
1.4 Program start
1.4.1 General
The main menu is always opened after starting the TURBO WAVE
program:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-11
Basic principles
Figure 1-4: Main menu
Functions of the icons on the function key bar:
F1
Call help
F7
Create measuring programs, Measure,
Evaluate
F2
Open measuring
program
F8
Hardware setup
F5
Measure
F6
Measure + Evaluate
F12
Exit program and shut down Windows
1.4.2 Menu overview
1.4.2.1 Measuring program menu
Command
Description
New
Creates a new empty measuring program.
Open
Opens an existing measuring program
(same function as button F2)
Import
Existing measuring programs from earlier versions
of TURBO ROUGHNESS (<V6.0) importiert werden
(see subsection Import measuring programs , page
1-13 )
Print Setup
Select and set up the desired printer for new measuring programs (Windows Printer dialog box)
=> all measuring programs are printed with the
printer set there!
Exit
1-12
The TURBO WAVE program is exited.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program start
1.4.2.2 View menu
Command
Description
Toolbar
Show/hide toolbar with the function keys
Status bar
Show/hide status bar
1.4.2.3 Options menu
Command
Description
Mode
A sub-menu for selecting the desired mode (user
levels, corresponds to functions keys F5, F6, F7) is
opened.
Setup...
The Setup menu for measurement position configuration is opened (F8).
Save settings on exit
Different settings (e.g. most recently used user
level, mode) are saved when exiting TURBO WAVE.
They are automatically active again at the next program start if this function is activated (checkmark!).
1.4.3 Import measuring programs
1.4.3.1 General
Existing measuring programs of earlier TURBO ROUGHNESS versions can be transferred to TURBO WAVE with the 'Import' function.
The measuring programs were managed in a database in TURBO
ROUGHNESS version <V6.0.
Select the “Import” command in the “Measuring program” menu to
start the import function.
The database has to be selected and logged in first the first time you call
the import function. A database wizard is therefore started before the
actual import dialog. The database is then already selected for further
imports and the import dialog box opens immediately (Figure 1-5).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-13
Basic principles
1.4.3.2 Work steps Data base wizard
1. Go to the “Computer data source” tab if necessary
2. Click on [New] in the “Computer data source” tab. The following dialog box
opens:
Click on the on-screen button [Continue].
3. Highlight the “Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)” entry in the list and then
click on [Continue].
1-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program start
4. Click on [Finish].
5. The following dialog box opens:
Enter “MPR” in the “File source name” box. Select the desired folder for
the database by clicking on [Select]. Click on [OK] again to exit the database wizard. All other prompts must be confirmed with [OK] or [YES].
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
1-15
Basic principles
6. Then the Import dialog box is displayed:
Figure 1-5:
Import measuring programs
The list contains all the measuring programs saved in the set file folder
(see entry under “File measuring programs”).
Mark a measuring program for import to TURBO WAVE.
Import options (see Import dialog box Figure 1-5, bottom left)
Pos.
Explanatory notes
1
The measuring program highlighted in the list is imported
(converted) and loaded immediately.
2
All measuring programs listed are imported. The programs are converted and saved in the database folder under the name “measuring
program name.rpg”.
3
The whole drive is searched for databases and all measuring programs found are imported as described under option 2.
If you want to import another measuring program database later from
another directory, click in the Import dialog on the [Change] button
Figure 1-5. The database wizard starts again.
1-16
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Data exchange format
1.5 Data exchange format
In TURBO WAVE a new data exchange format according to DIN/ISO
5436-2 has been introduced. This data format enables roughness and
contour profiles to be saved in a uniform format.
The previous data formats of TURBO CONTOUR and TURBO
ROUGHNESS are not supported.
The data format has the ending *.hwp.
After installation of TURBO WAVE the new data format is preset
automatically. The use of other data formats (for topography or
evaluation with HOMMEL MAP) must be selected explicitly.
Old profile data can be imported.
There is also an Import functionfor old measuring programs, see subsection Import measuring programs , page 1-13.
Data format
Remarks
*.hwp
•
New data exchange format in TURBO WAVE
•
is not supported by HOMMEL MAP!
•
Old data format of the TURBO ROUGHNESS software up to V6.14
•
is processed by TURBO WAVE
•
compatible with HOMMEL MAP
•
Old data format of
software up to V2.72
•
is processed by
TURBO WAVE
*.par
*.prf
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
the
the
TURBO
contour
TURBO WAVE V7.1
CONTOUR
evaluation
in
1-17
Introduction
2 Setup menu
2.1 Introduction
In the Setup menu the connected peripheral devices, interfaces and
the password protection can be set and configured.
The Setup menu is called in the main menu with the function key F8 or
under menu item Setup in the Options menu.
Settings made for the password in the Setup menu control the access
to the individual user levels (measuring program creation, extended
measuring mode).
In addition the configuration of the connected measuring station components (HOMMEL TESTER , linear traverse unit, measuring column,
contour probe etc.) is defined for every measuring station.
2.2 Measuring station configuration
2.2.1 Introduction
Fig. 2-1: Measuring station configuration dialog box
The Measuring station configuration tab contains two window sections:
The individual measuring stations are listed in the left hand window.
The peripheral components belonging to the measuring station selected on the left are selected and set in the right hand window.
The current configuration of the selected measuring station is displayed for orientation in the right hand window next to the buttons of
the individual components (e.g.: waveline 60 for the selected linear
traverse unit).
If several measuring stations are connected to one evaluation unit,
every measuring station must be configured individually as described
below.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-1
Setup menu
To include a new measuring station in the left window, click on the
[Add] button.
ATTENTION!
The configuration of the measuring stations must be performed
essentially before creating the measuring program! Only then can
the settings belonging to the measuring station be made later in
the measuring program.
The CAN bus system used by Hommelwerke allows the use of several
identical devices on one measuring station. Unique addresses (= device numbers) are assigned to these components for correct detection.
This address is programmed for every component and is automatically
detected by the TURBO WAVE software and displayed in the respective configuration dialog.
These device numbers may not be changed!
The devices can be analysed and tested with the wavetest service
software (in the installation folder).
2.2.1.1 HOMMEL TESTER (evaluation unit)
To select the connected evaluation unit, click on the button next to it in
the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "HOMMEL
TESTER“ dialog box is opened:
Fig. 2-2: Configuration HOMMEL TESTER
2-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Measuring station configuration
Select the respective evaluation unit activated by TURBO WAVE for
this measuring station by clicking an option box and assign the appropriate COM port on the PC if necessary.
Dialog box topic
Description
Interface
Selection of the COM interface => in T8000 CAN
not necessary!
Axis measuring signal
(=probe signal)
Select which axis is to be interpreted as a measuring signal.
Axis trigger signal
(=traverse unit display):
Select which axis (=traverse unit) is to be moved
during or for the measurement.
The wavesystem components are automatically recognised by
the software. They can only be connected to HOMMEL TESTER
T8000-CAN. Depending on the evaluation unit used only those
traverse units are available in the dialog box for configuration of the
linear traverse unit which are supported by the evaluation unit.
Special feature of
wavesystem
2.2.1.2 Linear traverse unit
The linear traverse unit serves for horizontal positioning of the scanning system. For configuration of the connected linear traverse unit,
click the button opposite it in the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "Linear traverse unit" dialog box is opened:
Fig. 2-3: Linear traverse unit configuration
Select the linear traverse unit used on the measuring station (or on the
measuring column).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-3
Setup menu
Special feature of
wavesystem
The wavesystem components are automatically detected by the software and can only be selected if a HOMMEL TESTER T8000-CAN
has been selected first. If another evaluation unit has been selected,
the waveline traverse units are no longer available (option boxes are
grey and not selectable).
Input topic
Remark
LV 15 ... LV 15/52
Select the used linear traverse unit
waveline 20 ... 200
Select the waveline linear traverse connected
(only possible with HOMMEL TESTER T8000-CAN
and T6000)
Synchronous
encoder
Older traverse units still operate partly without a distance measuring system. If a synchronous encoder is
then selected, the corresponding signal rate (1000 or
2000 Ipm/mm) which the synchronous encoder sends
to the evaluation unit must
be known.
(not for waveline
components)
If waveline components are connected, the "no
synchroniser" option will have to be selected.
Measuring signal
probe adapter
(not for waveline
components)
Pneumatic lift 1
(not for waveline
components)
Zero offset CNC
operation
Activate this checkbox if the signals of a roughness
measurement process are not routed through the
quill of the waveline (e.g. measurement with wavecontour or roughness probe on the probe adapter).
Activate this check box when the probe is to be lifted
before reversing to avoid damaging it (for special design LF15 with compressed air connection, =>see
technical documentation of the device for description)
To guarantee exact absolute positioning of the axes
in CNC operation, the probe position has to be
checked (X/Z co-ordinates) in some cases.
After this check the current probe co-ordinates at the
device’s inspection point are compared with master
values. If the newly determined probe position deviates from the master co-ordinates, the offset (zero
offset) determined for this axis must be entered in
this box. Detailed information about this can be found
in subsection Determining zero offset , page 9-23.
2.2.1.3 Measuring column
The measuring column serves for vertical positioning of the linear
traverse unit. Click in the button next to it in the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "Measuring column“ dialog box is opened:
2-4
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Fig. 2-4: Measuring column configuration
Input topic
Remark
Measuring column
Select the measuring column used at this measuring
station.
Lift measuring
column
Function for special designs with pneumatic lifting of
the whole column for moving with wavemove (the
whole measuring column is lifted when moving the
positioner)
Prerequisite: output interface of the ADDIDATA
PA2000 type
Output [dec]: description of the device on the output
card
Delay [ms]: time the operator must wait until lifting has
ended
The necessary inputs for output and delay can be
found in the separate technical descriptions or the data
sheet of the device delivered!
Zero offset CNC
operation
To guarantee exact absolute positioning of the axes in
CNC operation, the probe position has to be checked
(X/Z co-ordinates) in some cases. After this check the
current probe co-ordinates at the device’s inspection
point are compared with master values.
If the newly determined probe position deviates from
the master co-ordinates, the offset (zero offset) determined for this axis must be entered in this box. Detailed information about this can be found in subsection
Determining zero offset , page 9-23.
2.2.1.4 Tilt unit
The motorised tilt unit for the waveline devices allows automatic
alignment of the probing plane to the workpiece surface. To configure
the tilt unit, click on the button next to it in the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "Tilt unit“ dialog box is opened:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-5
Setup menu
Figure 2-5: Configuration of tilt unit
Input topic
Remark
Tilt unit
Select the "wavetilt" option if this HW tilt unit is
used. (The wavetilt tilt unit is automatically recognised as a wavesystem component by the CANBUS system.)
A manual tilt unit is not taken into account in the
Setup menu.
Request reference run
after initialisation
When this function is activated, wavetilt prompts a
reference run.
The standard setting for this function is not active
because a reference run is not normally necessary for wavetilt.
Zero offset
CNC operation
To guarantee exact absolute positioning of the
axes in CNC operation, the probe position has to
be checked (X/Z co-ordinates) in some cases. After this check the current probe co-ordinates at the
device’s inspection point are compared with master values. If the newly determined probe position
deviates from the master co-ordinates, the offset
(zero offset) determined for this axis must be entered in this box. Detailed information about this
can be foundin subsection Determining zero offset , page 9-23.
2.2.1.5 Contour scanning system
The probe used for the measurement with contour probes is selected
at this point. Click on the button next to it in the Measuring station dialog box. The "Contour“ dialog box is opened:
2-6
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Figure 2-6: Configuration of contour probe
Select one of the three probe options according to your measuring station configuration.
2.2.2 Other components
2.2.2.1 Y positioner/X positioner
A Y positioner is used for placing the workpiece at the measurement
position transverse to tracing direction. A typical application example is
the topography measurement in which several measurement tracks
need to be picked up. To configure a connected Y positioning table,
click on the button next to it in the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "Y positioner" dialog box is opened:
Y positioner
Figure 2-7: Y positioner configuration
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-7
Setup menu
The defaults for the Hommelwerke standard Y positioner are entered
automatically. These defaults will have to be edited accordingly if you
use another table (e.g. with 100 mm trace width).
Hommelwerke Y positioners are:
Note
•
HW-Y positioner (V24 interface)
•
wavestep (Y and X positioners with CAN-BUS)
When using a wavestep this is automatically detected by the software.
The device's data are then known and you only need to define the position specifications.
First select the used Y positioner and then complete the necessary entries for the device and the positioning as described below.
Input topic
Remark
max. travel [mm]
Enter the maximum travel of the HW-Y positioner connected (50 mm are the standard)
Pos. speed [1/s]
Enter the positioning speed for measurement/reference
run between 300 and 7000 1/s
(standard = 1500)
Ref. speed [1/s]
These data correspond to x stepper motor steps per
second. The actual speed depends on the gear and
spindle gradient => see technical documentation of the
device!)
Resolution [µm]
Enter the smallest possible positioning step for the Y
positioner (2.5 are the standard)
Home offset [mm]
Enter the positioning distance (distance from limit
switch to the home position of the positioner before the
measurement)
The positioner is moved this distance again after a
home run (return) to avoid interferences in the measurement.
Interface
Select the COM interface to which the Y positioner is
connected with the evaluation unit
Lift column
(special option)
Function for special designs with pneumatic lift of the
whole column to move with wavemove
The lift has to be activated here if this option is available.
Zero offset CNC
operation
2-8
To guarantee exact absolute positioning of the axes in
CNC operation, the probe position has to be checked
(X/Z co-ordinates) in some cases. After this check the
current probe co-ordinates at the device’s inspection
point are compared with master values. If the newly determined probe position deviates from the master coordinates, the offset (zero offset) determined for this
axis must be entered in this box.
Detailed information about this can be found in subsection Determining zero offset , page 9-23.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Analogously with the Y positioner the X positioner positions the workpiece in tracing direction. To configure a connected X positioning table, click on the button next to it in the Measuring station configuration
dialog box. The "X positioner" dialog box is opened:
X positioner
Fig. 2-8: X positioner configuration
Proceed as described for Y positioner in this dialog box.
All specifications apply analogously.
2.2.2.2 Rotary table
A rotary table is used for rotational positioning of a workpiece at the
measurement position. There are then several workpieces in different
holders on the rotary table (turntable). Click on the button in the Measuring station configuration dialog box to configure the rotary table. The
"Rotary table“ dialog box is opened:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-9
Setup menu
Figure 2-9: Rotary table configuration
The data for the HW rotary table are entered automatically. These initial
data must be adapted accordingly when a different table is used.
Hommelwerke rotary tables are:
•
HW rotary table (V24)
•
Rotary table wave (CAN)
First select the used round table and then complete the necessary entries as described below.
2-10
Input topic
Remark
max. trace angle [°]
Enter maximum trace angle of the rotary table (standard = 360 °)
Pos. speed [1/s]
Enter the positioning speed for measurement/reference run between 300 and 7000 1/s (standard = 1500)
Ref. speed [1/s]
These data correspond to x stepper motor steps per
second. The actual speed depends on the gear and
spindle gradient => see technical documentation to
the device!)
Resolution [µm]
Enter the smallest possible positioning step for the rotary table (0.036° are the standard)
Home offset [°]
Zero shift
Probe distance [°]
Here the angle distance between the workpieces
(workpiece holders) are specified on the turntable.
Interface
Select the COM interface to which the Y positioner is
connected with the evaluation unit
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Input topic
Remark
Zero offset CNC
operation
To guarantee exact absolute positioning of the axes
in CNC operation, the probe position has to be
checked (X/Z co-ordinates) in some cases.
After this check the current probe co-ordinates at the
device’s inspection point are compared with master
values. If the newly determined probe position deviates from the master co-ordinates, the offset (zero
offset) determined for this axis must be entered in
this box. Detailed information about this can be found
in subsection Determining zero offset , page 9-23.
2.2.2.3 Rotary feed
The waverotor rotary feed enables roughness and contour measurements on cylindrical, partly cylindrical, conical or other convex workpieces. Measurements can be made both in radial and axial
direction. The range of rotation is 360° left and right. To configure a
rotary feed, click on the button next to it in the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "Rotary feed" dialog box is opened:
Figure 2-10: Rotary feed configuration
Proceed analogously to the descriptions for the tilt unit (page 2-5) in
this dialog box.
2.2.2.4 I/O interface
When using interface cards for signal processing these must also be
specified in the Setup menu of the measuring station. Click on the button next to it in the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The
“I/O interface” dialog box opens:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-11
Setup menu
Figure 2-11: I/O interface configuration
Input topic
Remark
Input/output interface ADDIDATA
PA1000 and
PA2000
Optional interfaces:
PA1000 (input card for 32 inputs)
PA2000 (output card for 32 outputs)
Probe lift
Output:
output bit no. for controlling the output for the probe
lift (1...32)
Identifier:
see techn. documentation for ADDIDATA card
Delay:
time to wait for the lifting process
2.2.2.5 Remote control (manual operating unit)
wavecontrol embodies a robust, efficient remote control for the wavesystem components which can be used without further preparation for
all measurement tasks with a wavelift. Click on the button opposite it in
the Measuring station configuration dialog box. The "Remote Control"
dialog box is opened:
2-12
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Figure 2-12: Remote control configuration
Check the settings (wavecontrol is detected automatically).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-13
Setup menu
2.3 Probe configuration
2.3.1 Introduction
Probes and probe arms are defined and configured in the Setup
dialog/probe tab. All the functionally relevant data (stylus, linearity,...)
for roughness and contour probes can be specified and changed. This
provides the program with unambiguous information as to the probe,
the probe arm and the linearity correction of the probe.
Notes
Hommelwerke provides two types of probe at the moment which
can be used for simultaneous recording of roughness and contour:
•
TK probe (TKU, ...)
•
wavecontour surfscan
A diamond stylus is absolutely essential for determining roughnesses.
The wavecontour analogue and wavecontour digital probes cannot be
used for roughness measurement!
2.3.2 Select probe and probe arm
Figure 2-13: Probe configuration
The respective currently selected scanning system with probe type
and (if necessary) serial number of the probe and probe arm are
specified.
The columns underneath list all existing probe and probe arm data
saved by the software on the hard disk. You can add more probes and
probe arms by way of the dialog boxes accessed with the relevant buttons.
2-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Probe configuration
Input topic
Remark
Type
Select the used probe type from the list.
WCA = wavecontour analog / WDA = wavecontour digital
Serial no.
Select the serial number for the used probe type from
the list or add a new one to the probe type => see subsection Add probe , page 2-15.
Probe arm
Select the probe arm to be used from the list or add a
new probe arm for the selected probe with this serial
no. => see subsection Add probe arm , page 2-17.
Cancel/OK
Exit dialog box
Any changes which may have been made are not
saved when exiting!
Definition of terms on the probe
Stylus position
90°
Figure 2-14: Stylus position 90°
2.3.3 Edit probe data
2.3.3.1 Add probe
The technical data of new probes or other probe arms must be entered manually and provided to the program.
Press the [Add probe] button.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-15
Setup menu
The following dialog box opens:
Enter the serial no. of the new probe and confirm with [OK].
Note
If you also want to read in linearisation data from the enclosed disk, the
serial numbers must match the filenames on the disk exactly.
Only then can the data be clearly assigned!
Example:
The linearisation files on disk are called 79079.xxx. The probe in the
Setup menu must also be assigned serial number 79079.
2.3.3.2 Delete probe
Click on the [Delete probe] button to remove probe types from the list:
Note
2-16
Deleting a probe deletes all the probe arm data relating to that probe.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Probe configuration
2.3.3.3 Linear correction file
Any linearity error of the probe is corrected automatically to improve
the measurement accuracy. Normally this is only necessary for contour probes. If, however, profiles of roughness probes are used for
contour evaluation, a linear correction may have to be made.
This linearity error is determined for the delivered probe specially at
HOMMELWERKE. The linearisation data are saved in several files
and stored on the PC hard disk or on the disk delivered with the probe.
If no linearisation file has been saved on the hard disk for the measurement task yet, you can install it from the enclosed disk
(file *.lnk).
Press the button [Linear correction file].
If no linear correction file has been saved for the selected probe yet,
this has to be installed from the enclosed disk (press the [Install...] button). The file name is the serial number of the probe.
Further information about calibration and compensation can be found
in subsection Probe signal linearisation , page 10-5 .
2.3.3.4 Add probe arm
With the [Add probe arm] buttons, the "probe data" dialog box is
opened (to enter new or change existing probe arms):
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-17
Setup menu
Enter the article number of the probe arm in the “Designation” box.
The geometry data (probe arm radius, stylus radius) can be taken
from the certificate or probe table.
The probe height is only displayed here. The value is entered automatically as a result of the calibration of the stylus height.
2.3.3.5 Delete probe arm
Press the [Delete probe arm] button. A security prompt appears showing the data of the probe arm selected:
Check the entries and then confirm with [OK] if you really want to delete the probe.
2-18
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Password settings
2.3.3.6 Probe factors
Press the [probe factors button]. The following dialog box is open:
Only the measuring ranges relevant to the currently selected probes
are entered in the list. A correction factor can be entered for every
measuring range.
Further information about this topic can be found in subsection
Compensation and calibration.
2.4 Password settings
2.4.1 Introduction
In the Setup menu, Password tab you define and activate or deactivate the password protection for the user levels "Measure + Evaluate"
and "Create measuring program". In this way you can protect these
levels separately against unauthorised access.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-19
Setup menu
Figure 2-15: Password settings
Note
When the password protection is activated, you can only go to the
Setup menu itself with the password of the "Create measuring program"
level.
2.4.2 Change password
Press the button of the desired level. The "Password" dialog box is
opened:
Enter the currently valid password
and confirm with [OK].
Figure 2-16: 'Password' dialog box
If you have entered the correct password, a further dialog will be
opened:
2-20
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Defaults
Enter a new password in the box at the
top, confirm it by typing it again in the
second text box, then click on OK.
The program automatically returns to
the Setup menu, password setting tab.
The new password is immediately
valid.
Figure 2-17: 'Change password' dialog
box
Finally click on the relevant option button to activate (“ON”) or deactivate (“OFF”) the defined passwords.
A changed password only becomes effective after restarting the TURBO
WAVE software!
Note
To specify a new password, the password previously valid for the corresponding user level is required in any case!
ATTENTION!
The following standard passwords are set at the factory:
Level II – Measure and Evaluate: mode2
Level I – Create measuring program: mode3
If you have forgotten the password, please contact the Hommelwerke
Service!
Note
2.4.3 Password prompt
If the password protection has been activated you are prompted to enter this password immediately after restarting the TURBO WAVE program.
To quit the password prompting without entering a password, press
the [Cancel] button. Then you will only have access to measurement
mode 1 which cannot be protected by a password.
Once a password has been entered, it remains active until exiting the
TURBO WAVE software.
2.5 Defaults
In the tab of the Setup dialog box you can fix other defaults which are
to be activated automatically after starting TURBO WAVE.
If the “Create measuring program” user level is password protected,
the Setup menu is also protected and these defaults can only be reset
by the authorised user.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
2-21
Setup menu
Figure 2-18: Setup menu, define defaults
Dialog box topic
Description
Display "Open measuring program"
The “Open measuring program” dialog box appears
automatically as soon as a measuring program is
closed. This sequence can be interrupted with [Cancel].
Block "Measuring
conditions" in the
"Measurement"
mode
It is no longer possible to change the measuring conditions temporarily in the “Measure” mode.
Additional decimal
places for parameters
All parameters are displayed with an additional decimal place. The measurement accuracy is not
usually increased as a result.
Standard: The number of decimal places depends on
the measuring range (physical resolution).
[Measuring programs folder]
Click on this button to open the Windows dialog box
to select the memory location for measuring program
files. Choose another memory location if necessary.
The installation folder of TURBO WAVE is entered as
a standard.
2-22
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
3 Create measuring program
3.1 Introduction
3.1.1 Parts of the measuring program
The measuring program manages all the information needed to measure and test a workpiece. The TURBO WAVE software can realise a
variety of measuring and evaluating functions within the scope of the
roughness and profile measurement.
The measuring task must be defined and then a measuring program
created for the surface to be measured before a measurement is
made.
The data entered in the measuring programs represent important information about the measuring conditions and are the basis for the
comparability and reproducibility of the measuring results and for test
decisions. They are entered in a screen form and can then be printed
out and logged on a separate printout form.
The measuring program can be created in two ways:
•
free design of a new empty screen form
•
modification and adaptation of elements of an existing standard
measuring program to a new measurement task with subsequent saving under a new program name
The more efficient way is to adapt an existing measuring program template to the measuring task to be carried out since the basic data normally remain unchanged, a uniform program structure is guaranteed and
time can be saved.
TIP
Basic components of a measuring program in TURBO WAVE:
•
surface parameters as well as their tolerances
•
information about the measuring conditions (measuring device, probe
type, measuring range, traverse length, filter etc.)
•
screen and printout forms to display and report measuring results and
evaluations
•
surface profiles (primary profile, roughness profile, waviness profile)
•
characteristic statistical functions (frequency distribution of the profile
ordinate values, material ratio curve)
•
information regarding the statistical evaluation of a random test (Xq,
range, S, Xmax, Xmin)
other data which the measuring program may contain:
•
information about the test (company, test personnel, batch, date, time,
etc.)
•
information about the program flow (aligning, feed reverse etc.)
•
information about saving of surface parameters and profiles.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-1
Create measuring program
Note
The processing of measuring programs takes place in the "Create
measuring program" mode. Saved measuring programs can only be edited in this mode.
3.1.2 Opening the 'Create measuring program'
mode
The "Create measuring program" mode can be opened as follows:
1. Select the "New" item in the "Measuring program" menu of the main
menu
=> An empty form for creating a completely new measuring program is
created.
2. Mouseclick on F7 in the function key bar.
3. Mouseclick on the "Create measuring program mode" command in the
"Options" menu (main menu)
In cases 2 and 3 the "Open" dialog window is opened to select a
measuring program already saved on hard disk:
Figure 3-1: Open measuring program
Select saved measuring program and press the [Open] button.
Attention
The password prompt allows you to protect the "Create measuring program" mode against unauthorised access.
A password is set and activated in the Setup mode in the main menu
(see subsection Password settings, page 2-19).
Function key bar
A number of functions can be called quickly and directly with the function keys.
Figure 3-2: Function key bar in the "Create measuring program" mode
3-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
F1
Call help function
F7
Open the dialog box to set the
measuring conditions
F2
Save a measuring program
F8
Delete last measurement
F3
Load a saved profile
F9
Print report (change to print
report view)
F4
Save current profile
F10
Open profile analysis window
F5
Start a measurement
F11
Open contour evaluation window
F6
Goto adjustment window
F12
Close active measuring program => return to main menu
3.1.3 General work steps
To create a new measuring program or to edit a saved measuring
program, the following general steps have to be carried out:
•
Definition of the measuring conditions (traverse length, filters etc.)
•
Design and layout of the screen and printout forms (report)
•
Determination of the presets and input of the standard entries in the
forms (initial data, display options, colour, zoom etc.)
•
Save the screen and printout form under a freely selectable measuring
program name.
3.1.4 Menu overview
The tables below give a brief summary of the contents of the menus in
"Create measuring program" mode. You will find a detailed description
in the following subsections.
The contents of the screen and printout forms differ!
3.1.4.1 Screen form
Command
Description
New
An empty screen form is opened for creating a new
measuring program.
Open
An already saved measuring program is loaded.
Close
A measuring program is closed and a prompt appears
alerting you to any changes which have not yet been
saved. TURBO WAVE returns to the main menu.
Save/Save as
(F2):
The measuring program is saved under the active
name or under a new name The function key F2 can
also be used for this.
Print screen
form
Print out the contents of the screen form.
Print printout
form
Print the printout form content
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Measuring program menu
3-3
Command
Description
Print file
This command opens the "Profile" window and loads
the profile selected there into the Multiprint memory.
=> This function is only available when Multiprint was
activated
Profile menu
Page view
The screen or printout form is displayed in full page
view (corresponds to printer output).
Print setup
The Windows dialog box for editing the printer settings
is opened.
The functions in the "Profile" menu serve for editing of saved profiles
(e.g. important for twist measurement, topography).
Command
Description
Delete profiles of
active measurement position
All profiles of the active measurement position (see
also measurement position management) are deleted.
Delete profiles of
all measurement
positions
All profiles of all measurement positions are deleted
(see also measurement position management)
Save measuring
results (F3)
The measuring results of the current measurement are
saved in a parameter file (*.hwh or *.par).
Delete saved
measurement
(F8):
Delete the last profile from a profile file or delete the
whole profile file.
Export QSSTAT:
The export function to QS-STAT for the saved parameter file is started. (=> subsection Export QS-STAT, page 3-46 )
Import profile
Smd
SMD = standard data exchange format for profiles according to DIN ISO 5438, Part2
Export profile
Smd
With this, external profiles can be read with TURBO
WAVE and TURBO WAVE profiles exported for other
applications.
Import profile
ASCII:
A saved profile in ASCII format is imported for display
and evaluation in TURBO WAVE. The ASCII profile
must have been saved with TURBO WAVE or have the
same structure!
Export profile
ASCII:
3-4
The measured values of the loaded profile are saved in
ASCII format (*.asc) and can be opened and viewed
with any editor.
Export SUMEQAGRECAP
(OPTION):
The optional software package TRSAG must be installed for this (customer option).
Align (F11):
The profile is aligned over Lt (total traverse length).
Re-compute file
The current profile can be re-computed with modified
measuring conditions and the result profile then saved
separately.
Twist calculation
(option)
The software calculates those twist data from the profiles specified in the measuring program which are subtl
f th t i t
l ti
ith th
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
Command
Description
subsequently necessary for the twist evaluation with
the HOMMEL MAP software.
This process produces no visible result! The determined results are saved internally and transferred as
parameters when calling HOMMEL MAP.
Command
Description
Copy
Copy a highlighted item to the TURBO WAVE clipboard (cannot be copied from other applications).
Paste
The contents of the PC clipboard are pasted in at the
marked position. (without link information => element is
not updated)
Paste contents
An object from the Windows clipboard is pasted with a
link information.
Edit menu
=> The element is also updated in TURBO WAVE if a
change is made (e.g. tables).
Copy to clipboard
Copy a highlighted item to the Windows clipboard (can
then be taken over by other applications)
Object
Create a new graphic object with an external software
or from a file
Links
The link information of pasted objects (see "Paste contents") can be edited.
Adjustment [F6]:
The software moves to the adjustment window.
Measuring (F5)*
The software goes to the measurement mode.
* - depending on the setting in the program sequence,
F5 starts the following process:
•
normal measurement
•
automatic CNC run
•
twist measurement
•
topography capture
Start CNC program
The automatic CNC run is started.
Import company
header
The File dialog box is opened to import a company
header (*.kop) saved on the hard disk into the current
measuring program.
Command
Description
Parameters
The "Select parameters" dialog box for the selection of the
parameters to be computed by the measuring program is
opened
Program sequence
A dialog box for settings for the program sequence, for
topography, for CNC run and other special functions is
opened.
Measurement
position
The "Select measurement position" dialog box is opened
to select one of the measurement positions previously
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Menu
Settings
3-5
Menu
Form
3-6
Command
Description
position
created in the test plan editor. All defined measurement
positions are offered.
QS-STAT
Dialog box for general settings regarding the file export in
QS-STAT format is opened. (=> subsection QS-STAT settings, page 3-47).
Company
header
The dialog box for setting the contents of the company
header is opened (=> subsection Company header, page
3-12)
Measuring
documentation
The dialog box for setting measuring documentation is
opened (=> )subsection Measuring documentation, page
3-9).
CNC editor
The CNC editor for editing the CNC run is opened. (=>
subsection Functional description of the CNC commands,
page 9-2)
Measurement
position management
The "Measurement position management" dialog box
opens. (see also subsection Measurement positions, page
8-4)
All the commands in this menu generate an empty field on the screen
form or a box with pre-assigned entries as specified in the Settings
menu. To open a dialog for the definition of display options and entries, double click these boxes.
Command
Description
Parameters
Display of parameters (list) of the current profile and
specification of tolerances
Graphic P-R-WRk-WD1-WD2
Representation of the profile graphics
Frequency/Abbott
graphics
Representation of the graphics for frequencies and
material ratio
MOTIF xxx
graphics
Display of graphics for MOTIF parameters (analogously with the DIN/ISO profiles)
Graphic Contour
Display of contour evaluation of a profile
Graphic conductor
Representation of the graphic for conductor evaluation
(customer option)
Parameters list
Display of a list with the measured parameters and parameters selected for display
Statistics
Select those parameters for which current runtime statistics (Xq, S, Xmax, Xmin, Range) are to be kept
Company header/measuring
documentation:
Input of concrete entries (according to the form identifiers defined in the "Settings" menu) in company
header or measuring documentation and establishing
of display options for the forms (=>subsection Form
object measuring documentation and subsection, page
3-11) Company header form object, page 3-13
Text
Input and formatting of any text for the report
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
Command
Description
Date/Files
Establish display options for variables (date, time, filename etc.)
Frame
Format a frame (e.g. its colour) as the basisfor other
forms.
TURBO
CONTOUR parameters
Definition of display options for the Parameters form
TURBO CONTOUR (list) with input of tolerance bands
(see also subsection TURBO CONTOUR parameters
, page 3-23)
Command
Description
Profile analysis
The Profile analysis window is opened.
Contour evaluation (F11)
The evaluation window for evaluation with TURBO
CONTOUR is opened.
Topogr. analysis
The HOMMEL MAP software is started and the profile
surface is displayed.
Twist evaluation
The HOMMEL MAP software is started and the twist
profile displayed.
Levelling
Customer option (see separate documentation)
TURBO
CONTOUR
The separate TURBO CONTOUR program for contour
evaluation is opened.
Toolbars, function key bars,
status bar
Showing and hiding these bars
Command
Description
Font
Presets for font for all new form objects with text inputs
Grid
Set the grid for the whole form (paper)
Data format
Select data format for saving the profile data.
Menu
View
Menu
Options
Hwp = profile format for common use in roughness and
contour evaluation (managed by the parameter file
*.hwh)
PAR = old data format for roughness evaluation => no
contour evaluation possible!!
Options
Switch the unit from [inch] to [mm] and vice versa for
all dimension elements in the form
Date format
Select a display format for the date
Mode Measuring
conditions
A submenu for selecting the mode for the measuring
and evaluation conditions is opened:
Roughness / Contour and Roughness / Contour
The available measuring conditions and evaluation options vary according to the active mode.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-7
Menu
Window
Screen and printout forms can be displayed in different views (Cascade, Tile).
3.1.4.2 Printout form
Menu
Printout form
Command
Description
Print /
Print printout form /
Print setup
is opened.
Page setup
You can make entries for the header and footer, as
well as defining the size of the margins.
Page view
The full page is displayed (print preview).
Multiprint
activates/deactivates the Multiprint function
Multiprint
Print position
If this function has been activated, any free repetition
area in the Multiprint memory will be occupied for the
current measurement (automatic occupation is cancelled)
Multiprint >= 2
The form header is only printed once on the first page
when printing Multiprint forms.
Delete measurement from
Multiprint
One or more arbitrary measurements can be deleted
from the Multiprint menu
Print
Pages >=2...
All pages of the Multiprint form are printed without
header (on the assumption that the 1st page has already been printed with header).
Multiprint Reset
The next page is printed with header and page number
1 again. (reset the command 'Print pages >=2')
Print Multiprint
automatically:
The pages of the Multiprint form are printed automatically without prompting when they are full.
Explanations of the other menus in the printout form can be found in
the descriptions of the screen form.
3.2 Design report - general
The elements described in this subsection represent general information of a measuring report which can also be referred to as a report
header. They contain all general data on the measurement task and
workpiece but no measuring results and measuring conditions. The individual form objects are selected by the Form menu.
Presettings must be made for certain elements (measuring documentation, company header). The dialog boxes for this are opened in the
Settings menu.
3-8
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Design report - general
3.2.1 Insert frame
If a frame is required for the report header in the measuring program
(e.g. for inserting a company logo or a text module), select the Frame
form object.
Other objects such as company logos can then be placed on the
frame.
You can change the size and position of the frame by dragging it with
the mouse. The "Design frame object" dialog window appears when
you double click the object.
Figure 3-3: Frame design
Determine the desired attributes for the frame (frame lines, background, frame width, colour etc.).
3.2.2 Measuring documentation
3.2.2.1 Function description
The measuring documentation object is suitable for the specifications
in the measuring program which may differ for each single measurement although the same measuring program is used (e.g. batch
change, several inspectors....). These data can be updated and saved
with every measurement. Any information may be contained in the
measuring documentation.
The following options are possible unlike in the Company header object:
1. The measuring documentation can be automatically saved, together
with the measured profile
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-9
2. Before saving the profile, an input prompt can be agreed for an entry.
3. You can save an entry in the measuring documentation as a profile
text with the profile.
The options 1 and 2 are selected in the Settings menu in Program sequence(=>subsection Program sequence settings, page 3-49), option
3 in the settings for measuring documentation.
3.2.2.2 Settings measuring documentation
The "Measuring documentation" dialog box in the "Settings" menu allows you to define so called "form identifiers" for the variable entries in
the form. They identify the features of the entry in the measuring
documentation.
Figure 3-4: Settings measuring documentation
The form identifiers stay fixed and cannot be modified in the measuring documentation (in the form) display. If you do not want to specify
an identifier for certain entries, just leave the relevant fields blank.
You can also make text entries in the "Current entry" column in this
dialog box already if these remain relatively constant later. This saves
extra work. These entries can be changed at any time later in the finished form object!
If "Request measurement documentation" (=>subsection Program sequence settings, page 3-49) has been activated in the program sequence , the current entry from the measuring documentation can be
edited again before saving the profile.
3-10
Input topic
Description
Edit entry in measurement mode:
In this column, click on the relevant checkbox to
choose whether or not you want the current entry to be
changeable later in "Measure" mode.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Input topic
Description
Save as
profile text
Together with the profile measured, you can additionally save any entry of the measuring documentation as
a profile text. Then this text is shown in the "Parameters list" form field in the "Text" column (see subsection
Form object Parameter list, page 3-41 ).
If "Text input before saving" is specified in the program
sequence (=> subsection Program sequence settings,
page 3-49) the current entry of the measuring documentation will be proposed in the "Enter text" prompt
and can be re-edited.
3.2.2.3 Form object measuring documentation
Choose the "Measuring documentation" command from the "Form"
menu to generate a form field which initially appears blank.
By double clicking this field, you open the "Design object measuring
documentation" dialog window with several tabs.
In the "Properties" register, all the previously defined form identifiers
are displayed on the left (=> see alsosubsection Settings measuring
documentation, page 3-10). The "Entry" column is empty or contains
pre-entries. This column can then be extended or changed by further
entries.
In the "Show" column you can determine whether or not the entries of
the measuring documentation are to be visible in the form.
Figure 3-5: Measuring documentation – Define display
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-11
Other settings (e. g. regarding text format, background colour, font,
etc.) can be made in the other tabs.
Confirm your inputs with [OK] and exit the dialog box.
The form field can be changed in size and position on the report using
the mouse.
Figure 3-6: Example form measuring documentation
3.2.3 Company header
3.2.3.1 Function description
If you need to enter key identifying data in the report of the measuring
program, use the "Company header" form.
The company header essentially corresponds to the measuring documentation. For example, you can document information about the inspector, the date of inspection or any other data.
Note
Unlike the measuring documentation, however, the company header
cannot be automatically saved or edited after an input prompt.
The company header is therefore suitable for any information relating to
the measuring program which does not need to be continually changed
or saved along with every measurement. It is advisable to use the measuring documentation for variable data (batch changes, several inspectors etc.)
3.2.3.2 Company header settings
The settings and the creation of the form field for the company header
correspond to the same procedure as with the measurement documentation (=> subsection Settings measuring documentation, page 3-10).
3-12
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Figure 3-7: Company header settings
The form identifiers are permanently set, and can no longer be
changed on the company header display (on the form). If you do not
want to specify an identifier for certain entries, just leave the relevant
fields blank.
You can also make text entries in the "Current entry" column in this
dialog box already if these remain relatively constant later. This saves
extra work. These entries can be edited later at any time in the finished form object!
Input topic
Description
Edit entry in measure mode:
In this column, click on the relevant check box to
choose whether or not you want the current entry to be
changeable later in "Measure" mode.
Read data from
TurboFile (when
loading a previously measured
and saved profile)
If a company header has been saved along with the
measuring results (parameter file) (=> subsection
Company header form object, page 3-13) this can also
be loaded in the measuring report when loading a profile. To do this, activate the "Read data from TurboFile"
function in the "Company header" dialog window so
that this company header is also read in.
3.2.3.3 Company header form object
Choose the "Company header" command from the "Form" menu to
generate a form field which initially appears blank.
By double clicking this field, you open the "Design object company
header" dialog window with several tabs.
In the "Properties" register, all the previously defined form identifiers
are displayed on the left. The "Entry" column is empty or contains preentries. This column can then be extended or changed by further entries.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-13
In the "Show" column you can determine whether or not the entries of
the company header are to be visible in the form.
Figure 3-8: Design company header form
Save company
header
When this function is activated, the software saves the whole company
header once on exiting the dialog box. This can be reloaded with a
saved profile ("Read in data from TurboFile" => subsection Company
header settings, page 3-12).
The checkmark is removed automatically when the "Design company
header" dialog box is opened again. Changes can then be saved
again. The previous company header is overwritten.
3.2.4 Text object
The design of form objects with text content is carried out in the
"Form" menu with the "Text" command.
By double clicking the created form field, the dialog box "Design text
object" is opened to allow you to enter and arrange any texts as well
as to design texts regarding colour, font and type size.
3-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Figure 3-9: Design text object
Enter the text in the top input window. The text is displayed in the grey
box at the bottom as it is really displayed with the text attributes set in
the other tabs.
3.2.5 Date and files object
The "Date/Files" item in the "Form" menu also provides an empty form
field for displaying various editable entries.
Double clicking this form field opens the dialog window "Design
Date/Files object" in which various information in connection with a
measurement can be selected for display in the form (e.g. date and
time of measurement, name of the measuring program file, filename of
the profile to be evaluated etc.).
This display is updated after opening the respective measuring program.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-15
Figure 3-10: Date/Files form object
Entry
Description
Date
Current date
Current time
Current time
File measuring program
Measuring program filename with complete path
specification: C:\...\...\xxx.rpg
Date of measurement
Date on which the measurement was actually made
Measuring time
Time at which the measurement was actually made
File name profile
Profile filename with complete path specification:
C:\...\...\xxx.pip
Measuring program
name
Measuring program filename without path specification: xxx.rpg
Profile text
Optional profile text saved with the profile
3.2.6 Compile report header
From the individual form fields described in the previous subsections,
a report header can be compiled in the screen form (see graphic).
A measuring report header created in this way provides a unique reference to the test piece, the inspector, as well as to the place and time
of the measurement.
3-16
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Parameters Roughness measurement
Figure 3-11: Report header for measuring program - example
3.3 Parameters Roughness measurement
3.3.1 Introduction
The roughness profile (R profile) and the waviness profile (W profile)
are determined from the unfiltered primary profile (P profile) by profile
filtering in accordance with DIN EN ISO 11562. Parameters are defined for the three profiles which are indicated by the respective capital
letters P, R, or W.
Following DIN EN ISO 4287 all parameter definitions are valid for the
roughness profile as well as for the primary and waviness profiles.
The following standards describe the parameters:
DIN EN ISO 4287: Roughness parameters, profile parameters waviness parameters
DIN EN ISO 13565: core roughness parameters
DIN EN ISO 12085: motif roughness parameters
JIS B - 0601: roughness parameters
You will find further information on this topic in subsection Roughness
measuring, page 11-1!
The determination of the surface parameters to be measured in the
measuring program depends on the respective measuring task.
3.3.2 Settings Parameters
3.3.2.1 General
To define the parameters to be evaluated by TURBO WAVE in the
course of the roughness measurement, the "Parameters" dialog window is opened by the "Parameters" command in the "Settings" menu
(see graphic page 3-18).
This dialog box contains a number of tabs for the parameters of the
different profile types and evaluation standards. All the settings for the
parameters are made. The display options are only defined in the
form.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-17
The tabs are shown and their functions explained by a few examples.
The same descriptions apply for similar tabs which are not illustrated
here.
Note
JIS profiles can only be selected when the JIS filter has been set first
under "Settings measuring conditions"! (=> subsection ISO settings
(roughness only) , page 3-28)
3.3.2.2 Parameters dialog box
Primary profile
Figure 3-12: Example: Parameters primary profile
Roughness
profile
Figure 3-13: Example: Parameters roughness profile
3-18
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile RK
Figure 3-14: Example: Parameters Rk profile
The drop-down menu at the left lists all the parameters which can be
computed by the software. Clicking a parameter once automatically
shifts it to the "Show" column.
Dialog description
All parameters needed by the measuring program must be treated in
this way. All parameters or only some of them can be displayed later in
the screen form in the parameter form field from the selected quantity
of parameters.
A selected parameters can be reset to the "Select" column by clicking
in the "Show" column.
All settings in the whole dialog box always apply for the currently active
measurement position and therefore for the Parameters object assigned
to this measurement position! If other measurement positions use the
same parameters object as the active measurement position, the settings are also changed for these measurement positions. See also the
explanations in the Measurement position management subsection!
Note for measurement position
management!
If you edit an existing measuring program, resetting all parameters into
the "Select" column will make it easier to choose a new sorting order
in the "Show" column and consequently in the report.
Tip
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Selection
Lists all parameters available which can be computed
by the software
Display
Lists the parameters set for evaluation which can be
computed during the measuring run
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-19
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Set all
Sets all available parameters into the "Show" column
Delete all
Resets all parameters of the "Show" column back into
the "Select" column
Buttons
Specifies the cut-off line depth in [µm] or in [%] for
various material ratios from 1 to 20 of the unfiltered
(Pmr) profile in the "Tp cut-off lines" dialog window
(only for primary
profile!!)
[Pmr] [Pmr %]
In the left column, the sequential numbers are preset
for the cut-off lines selected (from the "Show" column),
where you can edit the cut-off line depths (e.g. from
1.00 to 2.50 µm).
Buttons
(only for MOTIF
parameters!!)
Cut-off line depth for bearing ratio in the unfiltered P
profile according to Motif standard (input values like for
TP cut-off lines):
Tpae/Tpaf and
Tpae%/Tpaf%
Button
Special support
part Tpaf
Setting the cut-off line depth range (start/end in %) for
the special bearing ratios (tpaf CR/ tpaf CF/ tpaf CL)
according to the Motif standard ISO 12085
(MOTIF parameters only)
Zero lines in %
(only for primary
and roughness
profile)
3-20
Specify a relative zero line (moveable to the profile
zero line) as a basis for the calculation of the bearing
ratios tpi and tpa (outliers are ignored)
tpaf/tpae are bearing ratios according to the Motif standard
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Discrimination
heights [µm]
Determination of the upper (C1) and lower (C2) discrimination height of the standardised peak number Pc
and for RSm and D.
(Roughness profile)
You can choose between two permanent options and
the free entry of discrimination heights.
Vo base cutting
depth [%]
Specify the cut-off line for the determination of the oil
retention volume Vo
(Profile Rk)
; Mr2 = cut-off line is positioned at the height of the
parameter Mr2 (material ratio below the core profile
with the calculation of Rk)
or:
Direct entry of a cut-off line at x %
3.3.2.3 Tolerances for parameters
Other functions are available for evaluation of set parameters in the
"Overview / Tolerances" tab.
The tolerances specified in the technical drawings for the surface parameters can be entered in the "Tolerance parameters" dialog window.
To open this input dialog box for the tolerances, press the [Tolerances]
button (see graphic).
Figure 3-: Enter tolerances for parameters15
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-21
All the parameters set at this time are listed in the "Parameters" column. Entries for setpoints, lower tolerance and upper tolerance can be
made here for every parameter.
Confirm your specifications with [OK].
3.3.3 Form object parameters
Create the form field for the parameters in the screen and printout
forms with the "Parameters" menu item in the "Form" menu.
The "Design parameters object" dialog window appears when you
double click the form field. Specify which parameters are to be displayed in the measuring report and design the form field with format
attributes in this dialog. It is possible to evaluate parameters but not to
necessarily have to display them in the report.
If a contour evaluation has been performed, the contour characteristics are also available for display in the Parameters form.
These settings can be made for all measurement positions available in
the measuring program (see measurement position management).
Only the active measurement position is always displayed (Settings =>
measurement position)!
TIP
The Standard measurement position always exists and can be used
when working without measurement position management.
Figure 3-16: Design form object parameters
3-22
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Selection
Lists all the parameters set for the measuring program
Display
Lists the parameters prepared for display in the report
(transfer to this column by clicking)
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Measurement position
If several measurement positions have been defined
in the course of measurement position management,
the unambiguous reference of the selected parameters to a measurement position can be made here.
Separate display settings can be made for every
measurement position.
Heading
Display
Select whether a table title (nominal, actual, LT, UT)
is to be displayed in the form
Display nominal values
Select whether the nominal values of the parameters
are to be displayed in the form
Display tolerance
limits
Select whether the tolerance limits specified are to be
displayed
Show exceeding of
tolerance
Select whether the exceeding of the tolerance limits
entered is to be displayed
Display = 0.000 => actual value is within the tolerance
limits (see graphic, Ra and Rz)
Display of actual deviation => actual value is outside
the tolerance limits (see graphic, Rmax)
As soon as a parameter is outside the tolerance limits, the actual value is highlighted visually (red and
underscored).
Example
3.3.4 TURBO CONTOUR parameters
If a profile export to the separate TURBO CONTOUR software has
been defined, the evaluated parameters are saved there in a parameters file.
These parameters evaluated in TURBO CONTOUR can then be displayed in turn in the screen form of TURBO WAVE. To do this, the
"Parameters TURBO CONTOUR" object is created in the "Form"
menu. To open the dialog window for setting the display options for the
contour parameters from TURBO CONTOUR, double click the form
template created.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-23
Figure 3-17: Display settings for TURBO CONTOUR parameters
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Number of parameters to display
The scope of theTURBO CONTOUR parameters to be
displayed in TURBO WAVE can be restricted by entering
an appropriate number. The display sequence depends
on the saving sequence specified in the TURBO
CONTOUR parameter file.
Tolerances
You can additionally display upper (UT) and lower (LT)
tolerance limits, as well as a nominal value, for the
TURBO CONTOUR parameters to be shown.
The display of the tolerable parameters is limited to a
number of 10.
3.4 Measuring conditions
3.4.1 General
The documentation of the measuring conditions in the measuring program serves to compare and reproduce the measuring results.
Of all measuring conditions, especially the traverse length, the profile
filter selected with the correct cut-off as well as the tracing system
used have considerable influence on the measuring result.
3-24
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Measuring conditions
The traverse length Lt consists of six single sampling lengths Le. The
length of a single sampling length correlates to the cut-off λc (cut-off
filter Lc).
The standard assignment of sampling lengths Ln and profile filters Lc is
defined for the measurement of roughness parameters with contact stylus instruments in DIN EN ISO 4288!
Note
3.4.1.1 Set measuring conditions mode
For a better overview in the definition of measuring and evaluation
conditions, three different modes can be preselected. These are divided into:
•
Roughness
•
Contour and roughness
•
Contour
The available measuring conditions and evaluation options vary according to the currently active mode.
Select the Mode command in the Options menu and then the measuring
conditions mode in the submenu which suits your measurement task.
Example: Roughness measurement conditions
This tab contains all measuring conditions required for the roughness
measurement.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-25
Example: Measuring conditions general (contour)
The General tab contains all measuring conditions required for a contour measurement.
Example: Measuring conditions roughness and contour
In the combined measuring conditions mode the master measuring
conditions for the complete measurement of a contour are still contained in the General tab. In the ISO settings tab only the measuring
conditions for the part of the sampling length for which a roughness
measurement is to be made are defined.
The selected mode can be read in the status bar next to the display for
the user level:
3-26
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
The roughness and contour mode is selected in this example, i.e. both
graphics are displayed. Only the top graphic appears for roughness
and only the bottom graphic for contour.
For fast switching to another measuring conditions mode just double
click this graphic display in the status bar. Click until the desired mode
is displayed.
Switch
mode
3.4.2 Defining measuring conditions
Use the "Measuring conditions" dialog window to preset the measuring
conditions for the measurement task to be carried out. To open this
dialog, use the command of the same name in the "Settings" menu.
Alternatively, click on function key F7.
The dialog is divided into several tabs. Different tabs are offered and
displayed depending on the preselection of the measuring conditions
mode. See also subsection Set measuring conditions mode, page 325.
3.4.2.1 Measuring conditions (general)
In this tab you will find the generally valid measuring conditions which
are important for the contour mapping. If roughness is also measured
within the contour sampling length, you have to define other parameters in the ISO settings tab which apply for the part of the total sampling length to be evaluated with roughness. If only roughness is
measured, this General tab is not available!
Figure 3-18: Setting general measuring conditions
Dialog box topic
Description
Scan distance
[mm]
= total traverse length of a contour or combined measurement (roughness and contour)
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-27
Dialog box topic
Measured values
spacing [µm]
(distance between
measuring points)
Description
= distance between measuring point which is to be used
during a measurement over the whole traverse length.
The software automatically calculates the corresponding
number of measuring points related to the selected traverse length.
Calculation formula:
Measured value spacing=traverse length/number of
measured values
Note for contour measurement with roughness:
Measure the measuring point spacing in the roughness
and contour mode so that it is conform for the roughness measurement! Recommendation: 0.5µm
Traverse speed
[mm/s]
Input of a freely selectable traverse speed depending
on the type of traverse unit used
Note:
In simultaneous mapping of contour and roughness the
speed must be adapted to the requirements of the
roughness measurement (approx. 0.2 to 0.5 mm/s).
This increases the measuring time considerably for
long contour traverse lengths!
No. of measuring
points
The number is given by the traverse length and measuring point spacing and is only displayed here.
Scanning time [s]
This value is given by the traverse length and traverse
speed and is only displayed here.
3.4.2.2 ISO settings (roughness only)
In this tab you will find all the measuring conditions which need to be
set according to DIN EN ISO for a roughness measurement. There are
other settings for the motif and JIS standard which are made in separate tabs.
Figure 3-19: Setting measuring conditions roughness measurement
3-28
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
3.4.2.2.1.1 ISO measuring conditions
Input topic
Remark
Lt [mm] - traverse length
The traverse lengths Lt given by the sampling lengths
Lm standardised according to DIN 4768 (or ISO 4288)
can be selected directly.
n x le =>definition of the traverse length as an integer
multiple n of the standardised single sampling length le
Others: Enter a freely selectable numerical value depending on the traverse length available
Note: The selection of a traverse length adapts the setting range for the filter setting Lc and the traverse speed
Vt automatically!
Lc [mm] – cut-off
filter
Select a standard cut-off filter wavelength (range dependent on the previously selected traverse length)
The cut-off which matches the previously selected traverse length is selected as standard.
others: Enter a freely selectable numerical value
Lc / Ls
Band-pass filter ratio for the rejection of the highfrequency profile portions (electrical noise)
Vt [mm/s] traverse speed
Selection of a traverse speed within the released range
(dependent on the selected traverse length)
others: Enter a freely selectable traverse speed depending on the used traverse unit type
=> the traverse speed Vt should be 1/10 (or less) of the
entered traverse length!
Filter
Select the profile filter for the filtering of the actual profile
of the surface (P-profile)
1. Standardised filter :
ISO 11562 (M1): phase-correct Gauss high-pass filter
(digital filter)
DIN 4768 (1974) (RC): a digital high-pass filter based on
the analogue 2-RC filter
JIS B 0601: Japanese standard (band-pass 75%)
2. Experimental filters: These filters are not standardised
and get by with about 10% start-up length.
Run-up length = Lc:
Function is deactivated (standard setting):
The run-up length in total is 1/6 of Lt. This is equivalent
to:
=> 1/12 Lt in + 1/12 Lt out (for M1)
or
=>1/6 Lt in (for RC)
Function is activated (checkmark): The run-up length in
total is the value Lc. This is equivalent to:
=> Lc/2 in + Lc/2 out (for M1)
or
=> Lc/2 in (for RC)
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-29
Input topic
Remark
Number of
measured values
(measuring
points)
Definition of a measuring point spacing which is to be
used during a measurement over the whole traverse
length Lt. The software automatically calculates the corresponding number of measuring points related to the
selected traverse length.
Measured value
spacing [µm]
(distance between measuring
points)
Calculation formula:
Measured value spacing=Lt/number of measured values
If one of these values is changed the software changes
the other values automatically according to the calculation formula.
Detailed information about determining the measuring
point spacing can be found in DIN EN ISO 3274.
Remove form
Switch the "Form removal" function on or off for the filtering of long wave frequency portions in the profile.
Lf: Enter a high pass cut-off in [mm] below which all frequency portions are to be filtered out
Note:
The cut-off is to be selected in such a way that all frequency portions belonging to the form are filtered (ISO
4287).
3.4.2.3 Additional settings for roughness in the contour
If both contour and roughness are measured in the course of measured value recording, the dialog box for the measuring conditions of
the roughness sampling lengths only contains the additional data for
roughness. All general measuring conditions (total traverse length,
measuring point spacing and traverse speed) are defined in the General tab for the whole measuring run.
The other measuring conditions for roughness are identical with the
ISO settings for separate roughness measurement.
Figure 3-20: ISO measuring conditions for roughness with contour
3-30
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Dialog box topic
Description
Starting point Lt
[mm]
Enter a starting point here in [mm] from which the
roughness measurement over the traverse length Lt is
to begin on the total traverse length (see measuring
conditions, General tab).
Lt is then part of the total sampling length.
lt
mm
Lc, Lc/Ls, filter
etc.
Length of the traverse length for the roughness measurement
see description of ISO settings roughness in subsection ISO settings (roughness only) , page 3-28.
Roughness evaluations within a contour profile can only be performed
and displayed in the contour evaluation window!
Note
3.4.2.4 Probe data
In the probe tab all the measuring conditions associated with the used
probe are defined.
Figure 3-21: Select probe measuring conditions
Dialog box topic
Description
Probe type
Select the used probe type from the list here. All standard probes and all special probes created in the Setup
menu are listed. Calibrated probes are at the end of the
list!
Probe data
With this button you can view the probe data for the
currently selected probe type.
Measuring range
[µm] - measuring
range
The probe type identifies the max. possible measuring
range of the probe and thus determines the scope of
the measuring range. This can be selected within the
released ranges.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-31
Note
Dialog box topic
Description
Compensations
Switch on the compensations useful for the measurement task (checkmark set). Make sure that the appropriate calibrations have been performed first. Detailed
information about compensation and calibration can be
found in subsection Calibrate the scanning system,
page 10-8.
For exact contour measurements it is necessary to eliminate all the profile changes and distortions which occur. Therefore all compensations
must be adjusted and activated!
3.4.2.5 Motif and JIS settings
Motif standard
Further setting options are available in this tab for the French Motif
standard.
Figure 3-22: Set Motif measuring conditions
JIS standard
3-32
A [µm]
= limit values for the Motif lengths (ISO 12085)
B [µm]
Select the given value or select the 'others' option and enter
a freely selectable numeric value.
For the Japanese JIS standard the cut-offs for the band-pass filtering
according to JIS B 0601 are specified in this tab.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Figure 3-23: Setting JIS measuring conditions
FL [mm]
FL = cut-off for low pass filtering (L=low)
FH [mm]
FH = cut-off for high-pass filtering (H=high)
Select a given value or select the 'others' option and enter a
freely selectable numeric value.
3.4.2.6 Rotation settings
If the waverotor rotary feed has been set in the Setup menu, this tab is
activated. Enter the workpiece diameter here. The angle of rotation
and the angle speed are calculated and displayed automatically.
Figure 3-24: Setting measuring conditions for rotary feed
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-33
3.4.3 Form object measuring conditions
The form object for displaying the measuring conditions in the measuring program is created in the "Measuring conditions" menu item in the
"Form" menu (screen or printout form).
Double click the form field to open the "Design measuring conditions
object" window. Define which measuring conditions are to be displayed
in the report. Activate or deactivate the appropriate checkboxes.
Figure 3-25: Dialog box output measuring conditions
TIP
Activate the measurement position display so that you can always see at
which measurement position the program currently is.
3.5 Profile diagrams
3.5.1 Introduction
The information content of the graphical representation is very important for the practical evaluation of the surface measurement. In the
"Create measuring program" mode, TURBO WAVE offers form fields
for the graphical representation of the following diagrams:
3-34
•
primary profile (ISO 4287, P profile),
•
roughness profile (ISO 4287, R profile),
•
waviness profile (ISO 4287, W profile)
•
Rk profile (ISO 13565, filtered with M2-filter for the computation of the
Rk-parameters)
•
edge primary profile and edge waviness profile
•
WD1 and WD2 profile (dominant waviness)
•
contour profile (profile measurement)
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile diagrams
The following representations are also possible:
•
the material ratio curve of the primary profile or of the roughness profile as a statistical cumulative frequency representation of the surface
ordinate values (Abbott graphics)
•
the relative frequency of the surface ordinate values (frequency graphics).
All profile graphics as well as the diagrams for material ratio and frequency can also be displayed according to the Motif standard or the
JIS standard.
3.5.2 Profile graphic form object
3.5.2.1 Creating a form object
An appropriate form object is created with the various commands in
the "Form" menu to display the profile graphics in the measuring program:
Figure 3-26: Example form field P-profile
Double click on the form object to open the "Design profile object" dialog window for display option settings:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-35
Figure 3-27: Display options for profile diagrams
Note
Important measuring conditions such as probes, filters, traverse length
and speed are displayed automatically in the profile graphics form.
Display attributes can be selected here for every profile (colour, frame,
font, background etc.). The axis scale and the profile magnification are
also determined. In the "Lines" tab, the display of horizontal and vertical lines and the counting thresholds can be set.
Note
This dialog must be edited separately for every profile diagram. It is also
possible to display several profiles in one diagram.
Profile magnification
An important job is to set the horizontal and vertical magnification
(oversize) for the representation of the profiles. The graphics of the
surface profile should have the typical character, i.e. it should represent as descriptively as possible the size, form, and structure of the
micro-geometrical profile deviations. This can be achieved by means
of an exploded view of the profile characteristic with an appropriate ratio between the vertical and horizontal magnification settings. As a
rule, the vertical magnification is much greater than the horizontal
magnification.
Standard case:
The profile is automatically fit with the whole traverse length Lt to the
available diagram width. The "automatic" option is preselected as a
3-36
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile diagrams
vertical scale as standard so that the profile can also be fit vertically
into the diagram. This covers about 95% of all applications. Select another vertical scale to set a different vertical magnification.
Special cases:
If, for example, several identical workpieces are tested consecutively,
it is useful to always used the same magnification for every further
diagram or in Multiprint. Changes in the graphic are then detected immediately.
Click the [Zoom] button to open the necessary dialog box:
Figure 3-28: Profile display magnification dialog box
Here the vertical and horizontal magnification can be defined separately manually.
The settings only become effective when the "Representation after
Vv/Vh" function is activated!
Attention! These settings remain priority until the function is deactivated
again. The settings under "Scale" have no effect until then.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-37
Examples
Figure 3-29: Example: Form R profile with automatic magnification
Figure 3-30: Example: form R profile with manual magnification
3.5.3 Form object material ratio curve and frequency
3.5.3.1 Definition of terms
To statistically analyse the shape of the surface profile and to graphically represent the material ratio, the forms "Abbott graphics" and
"Frequency graphics" are integrated in the measuring program.
The distribution density of the surface profile amplitudes is represented in the "Frequency" graphics. The material distribution of the
surface profile is represented in the "Material ratio" graphics.
3.5.3.2 Creating a form object
To display the two curves in the measuring program, a form object
(Abbot graphic or Frequency graphic) is created with the appropriate
command in the "Form" menu:
Double click the form fields to open the dialog window "Design object...", where you can carry out the required settings to create the
form.
3-38
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile diagrams
Figure 3-31: Example: Design object frequency
Input topic
Remark
P, R, W, Rk, WD1,
WD2 profile
determines which profile is to be displayed
Representation
Selects the colour of the curve or of the area
Type of representation
relative (0 - profile depth): Starting from 0 (top ordinate
point ) to the respective maximum profile depth (lowest
ordinate point) the ordinate is divided proportionally, i.e.
the graphic is represented relatively to the profile zero
line
Only one profile can be displayed!
absolute (fixed, according to profile representation):
The ordinate is divided symmetrically in both directions
(+/-) according to the selected scale in [µm] starting
from zero (corresponds to the zero line in the profile
representation):
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-39
Input topic
Remark
=> If the selected scale is too big, only part of the
graphic is displayed in the form!
Scale
Specify the scale for the ordinate values of the graphics
automatic: The scale for the ordinate division is automatically adapted by the software
x1...x100: The scale of the ordinate is magnified by the
value selected (if the "absolute according to profile representation" option has been selected).
Magnification
By means of this button, the dialog for setting a vertical
or horizontal magnification of the profile representation
is opened (analogous to the profile graphics).
In the "Lines" tab, the display of horizontal and vertical lines and the
zero line display can be set.
Note
The position of the zero line must be defined first in the parameter settings otherwise it cannot be displayed.
Example
Figure 3-32: Abbott and Frequency graphics
3.6 Measured value statistics
3.6.1 Introduction
In order to determine the production related dispersion of the measured variables, several measurements must be made at different positions of a surface under identical conditions and the measured values
of the parameters evaluated statistically. Then statements about the
capabilities of the production process with regard to quality can be
3-40
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Measured value statistics
made. This also applies to the statistical evaluation of the surface topographies.
For this TURBO WAVE offers the form objects "Parameter list" and
"Statistics" to display the parameters (measuring results) and statistics. The parameters of every measurement must be saved for this
function. To do this, activate the Autosave for parameters and profile
function under Settings Program sequence or save the results after
every measurement with F4 (=> subsection Settings tab, page 3-49).
3.6.2 Form object Parameter list
For selected parameters, the saved measured values are listed in the
"Parameter list" form field. To create the form template, select the
menu item of the same name in the "Form" menu.
Figure 3-33: Parameter list form - empty
Double clicking the empty form object opens the following dialog box:
Figure 3-34: Parameter list dialog box
If several measurement positions were defined in the scope of measurement position management, the clear relation of the selected parameters and settings to a measurement position can be determined
in the 'Measurement position' list box.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-41
Separate display settings can be made for every measurement position.
The desired parameters are set with a simple mouseclick (left) in the
display window (right) and are displayed in the form. Optionally you
can display date, time, text and measuring conditions of the respective
measurement in the list.
You can set how many and which measurements are to be displayed
in the "from" and "to" option boxes. For this purpose, enter the exact
measurement numbers or the words "first measurement" or "last
measurement" in the text boxes opposite (can be entered quicker by
clicking on the button of the same name).
These settings can be made for all the measurement positions available in the measuring program (see measurement position management). Only the active measurement position is displayed (Settings =>
Measurement position)!
TIP
The Standard measurement position always exists and can be used
when working without measurement position management.
The parameter file belonging to the measuring program is assigned in
the program sequence with name and memory path (=> subsection
Parameter file tab, page 3-51).
Settings for font, colours, background and frame are possible in the
other tabs.
Confirm all inputs with [OK]. The form which was previously empty
now looks like this:
Figure 3-35: Parameters list form (parameters set)
3.6.3 Table of parameters form
With the 'Table of Parameters' object it is possible to display all the parameter data in a table. Several measurement positions and sequences can be taken into account. To create the form template, select the menu item of the same name in the "Form" menu.
3-42
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
By double clicking the empty form object the following dialog box
opens:
Figure 3-36: Parameter table dialog box
The [Table size] button opens a dialog box for entering the desired
number of columns and lines. The current number of lines and columns is shown on the right. You can adapt the initially selected table
size at any time!
A table with eight lines and 8 columns looks like this for example:
Figure 3-37: Parameter table dialog box (lines empty)
By clicking the lines between the columns in the heading line, you can
change the width of the columns by dragging with the left mouse button pressed.
Every line in the table can then be filled in individually. The cell must
be clicked (marked) to do this. Various functions are then available in
the context menu opened with the right mouse button. The dialog
boxes for the context lines all have a similar structure and are selfexplanatory:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-43
Figure 3-38: Dialog box for selecting the parameters for the object table
Overview of the possible cell contents (context menu):
Command
Description
Delete
All contents of the marked table cell are deleted
Text
A dialog box for entering and formatting any text is
opened.
Name of
parameter
The name of the selected parameter then appears in the
cell.
Value of parameter
The actual value of the selected parameter is displayed
in the cell.
(actual value)
3-44
Nom. value
The nominal value of the selected parameter is displayed in the cell.
Upper tolerance
The upper tolerance for the selected parameter is displayed in the cell.
Lower tolerance
The upper tolerance for the selected parameter is displayed in the cell.
Tolerance
deviation
The tolerance deviation for the selected parameter is
displayed numerically in the cell.
Tolerance diagram
The tolerance deviation for the selected parameter is
displayed in the form of a barchart in the cell.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Apart from the Text function, all other functions are references to contents of the measuring program or the measuring results which can be
output in relation to measurement positions. The Standard measurement position always exists and can be used when working without
measurement position management.
A Table of Parameters filled in in the screen form may look like this for
example:
3.6.4 Statistics form object (list)
In the statistics list, the statistic parameters computed from the measured values of the measuring series are output e.g. the mean value
Xq, the standard deviation S, the maximum (Xmax) and the minimum
(Xmin) measured value and range.
Create and design the "Statistics" form field in the same way as the
"Parameter list" form field.
Figure 3-39: Set statistics dialog box
For all parameters set in the "Statistics" dialog box, statistics are kept
in the course of several measurements; further, the parameters Xmin,
Xmax, Range, Xq, and S are determined and they are displayed in the
"Statistics" form.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-45
Figure 3-40: Statistics form
3.7 Export functions
3.7.1 Export QS-STAT
3.7.1.1 General
This function enables a saved parameter file to be exported in QSSTAT format (file format for data export for control card creation). This
function is not available in the"Measure" mode (restricted mode)!
The following QS-STAT files are generated (for QS-STAT to V2.6):
•
File structure for part related data (*.dft)
•
File structure for characteristic-specific data (*.dfi)
•
Standard files for values (*.001 - *.xxx)
In DFQ-format (for QS-STAT as of V3.0), *.dfq files are generated.
The information from the company header, measuring documentation
and the profile text and the parameter designations are also exported.
Note
The QS-STAT key fields fix the meaning of the fields for company header
and measuring documentation (= form identifiers).
Company header
The following assignments apply (only the first 10 lines are exported):
3-46
Company
heade
r
QS-STAT ≥ V3.0
QS-STAT ≤ V2.6
DFQ format
DFI/DFT format
Key field
Line / File
1
K1053
5 / *.dft
no. of order
2
K2312
10 / *.dfi
Measuring task / AVO
3
K1001
1 / *.dft
Part No.
4
K1002
2 / *.dft
Name
5
K1062
39 / *.dfi
Workpiece No. / Random test
6
K1032
40 / *.dfi
Random test element
7
K1204
14 / *.dft
Production date
8
K1061
7 / *.dft
Account
9
K1203
13 / *.dft
Examination
purpose
10
K2305
9 / *.dfi
Production machine
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Assigned
company header
identified
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Export functions
The profile text from the parameter file *.par is transferred to the "Test
location" (in *.dfi in line 14).
Profile text
Parameter designation
The parameter designation (e.g. Ra) *.par is transferred to the "Test
type" position (in *.dfi in line 15).
3.7.1.2 QS-STAT settings
The QS-STAT settings are specified in the "Create measuring program" mode. To set the file path for the QS-STAT files to be exported
as well as for specific parameters, open a dialog using the "QS-STAT"
command in the "Settings" menu.
QS-STAT lines
(dfi format)
19
20
21
Figure 3-41: QS-STAT settings
Input topic
Explanation
Path for QS-STAT
files
Select the file saving path for the export of QSSTAT files with the [Change] button
The path is removed again with [Delete]
QS STAT format
Select the desired export format (DFI/DFT or DFQ).
Additional options:
DFI/DFT: create new characteristic for every measurement:
Each parameter saved per measurement corresponds to exactly one characteristic, i.e. 3 measurements, each one with 2 parameters, correspond
to 2*3=6 characteristics.
DFQ: Connect file name with time:
The filename in DFQ contains the corresponding
time.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-47
Input topic
Explanation
Averaging
State how many measurements are to be averaged
or select "No averaging". If fewer measurements
than specified are available, only the available
number are used for averaging.
Only this average is then exported to QS-STAT!!
QS-STAT specific
data
Export tolerances:
For each parameter, the specified tolerances LT/UT
are saved together with the parameter. Activate this
function if the tolerances of the parameters are to
be exported.
(Export only in DFI
format)
Random test range machine capability:
Enter the random test range n(tot) for the machine
capability (=QS-STAT line 19).
Process capability:
Enter the random test range and the number of
random tests for the process capability (=QS-STAT
line 20/21)
These data can only be exported to QS-STAT in
DFI format. The data are then written in lines
19/20/21.
Delete parameter file
The master data (parameters and profile data) are
deleted!
3.7.1.3 Start export
The export function of the saved parameter file is started by the "Export QS-STAT" command in the "Profile" menu. This command is
available in both the "Create measuring program" and "Measure +
Evaluate" mode and can be used for every saved parameter file (see
also subsection Start export, page4-30).
3.8 Program sequence
A number of other settings can be defined to prepare a measurement.
These are entered in the Program sequence menu in TURBO WAVE.
They include the following functions:
3-48
•
Measure program sequence
•
CNC run (CNC-Editor)
•
Topography
•
Extraction functions
•
Align
•
Contour (contour measurement setting)
•
Fourier analysis
•
Edge evaluation
•
Polynomial fit
•
Profile export to external contour software TURBO CONTOUR
•
Conductor measurement (customer option)
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
In "Create measuring program" mode TURBO WAVE offers the facility
to define presets for the functions mentioned. In "Measure + Evaluate"
mode those presets can be temporarily modified for the current measurement.
Select "Program sequence" from the "Settings" menu. A dialog box
with a number of tabs on it opens up. The functions offered by the
various tabs are described in the following subsections.
3.8.1 Program sequence settings
3.8.1.1 Settings tab
Figure 3-42: Measure program sequence settings
Input topic
Explanation
Selected
measuring
station
The current measuring program is allocated to a measuring station already configured in the "Setup" menu.
The list contains all the currently set-up measuring stations.
Return trav. unit
after measuring
run
The traverse unit automatically returns to the selected
position after the measuring run (see Return functions).
Text input before
saving
Enables the easy text entry with an entry prompt before
saving the measuring results (maximum 25 ASCII
characters are possible)
Attention!
Always make sure that the axis traverse is clear!
The profile text saved like this is shown in the "Profile"
dialog, "Text" column once a parameter file is loaded
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-49
Input topic
Explanation
("Load profile" function – F3)
In the settings belonging to the measuring documentation any entry of the measuring documentation can be
selected for taking over as a profile text (see subsection
Settings measuring documentation, page3-10)
Save measurement. documentation
The measurement documentation with the current entries is automatically saved with the profile.
With waveline 20
Automatic
The waveline 20 traverse unit’s own motorised probe lift
is switched on.
(special version
with motorised
probe lift!)
Function active:
The probe is moved up and down by a motor in the waveline 20 before and after the measurement.
Function inactive:
The waveline 20 and probe must be positioned on the
workpiece surface by moving the measuring column.
Probe force inverse
Setting for special probes with 2 possible probe force directions (double stylus)
=> stylus facing up: probe force = inverse
=> stylus facing down: probe force = normal
Accept analysis
setting
(from profile analysis)
Settings from the profile analysis (e.g. partial alignment,
extraction, Fourier...) are transferred automatically to the
program sequence dialog in the event of changes in the
profile analysis window after closing and are used for
new profiles.
invert profile
The profile line will be represented mirror-inverted to the
x-axis, i.e. valleys become peaks and peaks become
valleys. This function is used for measuring impressions
for example.
Stroke monitoring negative
The stylus distance given by the probe type setting (e.g.
TK100 = +/-100µm) will be monitored automatically in
positive direction and the measuring run will be brokenoff upon exceeding the maximum permissible probe lifting If the probe has no automatic lift, this function must
be activated so that the measuring run can be broken off
even on exceeding the negative stroke (e.g. if it falls into
a bore) to avoid probe damage.
reverse measurement direction
The direction of movement of the probe is reversed for
the measuring run. The traverse unit moves to the left
opposite to the normal measurement direction!
Request measuring documentation
Before saving the measurement, an input prompt is displayed to be able to change or adapt the entries in the
measuring documentation.
If this function has been deactivated, the measuring
documentation content configured in the form will be
saved automatically.
save company
header
3-50
The company header data are saved for the first time if
the company header file "Parameter_name.kop" does
not yet exist.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
Input topic
Explanation
Traversing direction
inverse
Activate this function when the probe is mounted turned
180° (overhead measurement, stylus facing up).
Return functions
Define here what position the linear traverse unit is to return to at the end of the measurement or with F6 is the
Return trav. unit after measuring run has been activated.
3.8.1.2 Parameter file tab
The options for saving the measuring results are defined in the Program sequence menu, Parameter file tab.
Figure 3-43: Settings for saving the parameter file
Subject
Description
Parameters
file
Using the "Change" button, the name and the file saving
path for the parameter file to be saved can be edited (e.g.
create a new parameter file under changed measuring conditions)
Note:
If a new directory name is entered in the input box before
the parameter file name, this new directory will automatically
be created on the hard disk after the first measurement,
provided it does not already exist! Hence, it must no longer
be created in the Explorer.
Input rule: Directory name\Name of Parameter file
Autosave
Parameters and profiles are saved in the current parameter
file without prompting with this function.
Note:
This function must be active if a topography is to be recorded or a profile export is to be performed for the separate contour evaluation software TURBO CONTOUR.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-51
3.8.1.3 Align tab
The options for aligning the profile are defined in the Program sequence menu, Align tab.
This function specifies whether or not the mean line of the profile
graphics should be automatically aligned to the X axis after the measuring run (correction of a profile skew position)
Figure 3-44: Settings for aligning the profile
Subject
Description
Do not align:
The profile will not be automatically aligned after the
measuring run
Align over Lt
The profile will be automatically aligned over the whole
traverse length after the measuring run (method: sum
of least square errors) .
Partial align
The profile is aligned automatically after the measuring
run over one or more partial lengths of Lt.
The beginning and end of up to 10 aligning intervals
can be specified in mm.
Tip:
To perform this function more elegantly, the aligning intervals can be manually set within the profile analysis
using the ruler feature. To do this, select F3 in the Profile analysis window and proceed as described
there.(=>subsection Rulers, page 5-5)
3.8.1.4 Topography tab
In the "Topography" tab in the Program sequence menu, the topography option is switched on or switched off and all the necessary set-
3-52
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
tings for the topography measurement are defined for the relevant
measuring station components and the connected plotter.
You will find further information about this in subsectionSettings, page
7-1.
3.8.1.5 CNC-Editor
A fully automatic measuring run can be programmed in the CNC
editor tab in the Program sequence menu.
You will find further information about this in subsectionProgramming
the CNC run, page 9-2.
3.8.2 Program sequence roughness evaluations
3.8.2.1 Extracting profile segments
In the Program sequence menu, Extract tab all the extraction functions are set. With this function unwanted profile segments known before the measurement (e.g. a bore or edge in X direction) can be extracted.
Extraction is then automatic and is performed immediately after the
measurement is completed.
Figure 3-45: Extracting profile segments
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-53
The following extractions are possible:
Extract
partially
•
Extract partially
•
Extract over the cut-off edges
Using the "Extract partially" option, precisely defined profile segments
are extracted.
For this purpose, up to 10 different extraction intervals (start and end
in mm) can be entered in the table.
Extract
over
cut-off edges
With this option, a cut-off line is laid in the profile on a level to be
specified and is then extracted above or below the resulting cut-off
edges.
Furthermore, a buffer distance (safety margin) can also be specified
which is also hidden when exceeding the hiding threshold before or after the hiding profile.
Extraction criteria
Explanation
cut-off line level (n)
The cut-off line level can be determined from:
(extraction threshold)
the mean value of all profile points
or
the zero line of the profile graphic
Offset: An offset can also be added to these two options. By entering a value for offset, the respective
selected cut-off line level is relatively relocated by
that value.
Evaluation range
Selection of the evaluation range:
Evaluation can take place above or below the selected cut-off line.
Above cut-off level => extract all points which are
positioned below the extraction threshold
Below cut-off level => extract all points which are
positioned above the extraction threshold
Safety margin to be
extracted
Enter a buffer distance in [µm] which is additionally
extracted when exceeding the extraction threshold
before and after the extraction profile
3.8.2.2 Setting Fourier analysis
In the Program sequence menu, Fourier tab the basic settings for
Fourier analysis of the profile are entered. The presets for the Fourier
synthesis function are entered in the "Fourier" tab.
Detailed information about the Fourier analysis can be found in subsection Fourier analysis, page 5-13.
3-54
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
3.8.2.3 Setting edge evaluation
The automatic edge evaluation can be programmed by setting the appropriate parameters in the Edge evaluation tab in the Program sequence menu.
The profile is evaluated and displayed automatically when the edge
detection is switched on.
The profiles are then distinguished as follows:
P* = primary profile without edge detection (traverse length = Lt)
W* = waviness profile without edge detection (traverse length = Lt, filter Lc)
P/W = primary profile/waviness profile after edge detection (all edges
extracted)
A given pitch delta is pushed theoretically along profile P* until the rising profile edge is cut by the delta. The delta is mirrored for the falling
edge. The process can be repeated several times.
Principle
of
edge detection
It applies that:
The height of the edge detection h = L * tan φ
Figure 3-46: Principle diagram of pitch delta on the P*-profile
1 = edge detection (point
of intersection)
R = safety
margin
Pi = primary
profile after
detection of
st
the 1 edge
Figure 3-47: Detailed sketch of edge detection for a profile cut-off Pi
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-55
Settings
Edge detection
Figure 3-48: Settings for edge evaluation
3.8.2.3.1.1 Setting edge evaluation
Input topic
Description
Type
Select the edge type which applies for the profile.
Number of repetitions
Input: 0 => only a P-profile is searched for in P*
=> only for type
a) and b)
Pitch angle
Input: n => other n P-profiles (Pi) are searched for in P*
From all found profiles Pi a total profile P is made up
from which the other profiles W, R etc. can be calculated.
Enter the pitch angle φ of the delta.
It applies that: h = L * tanφ (see Figure 3-46: Principle
diagram of pitch delta on the P*-profile).
3-56
Safety margin to
be extracted
A safety margin R can be extracted additionally starting
from the detected edge in the direction of the P profile
(see Figure 3-47: Detailed sketch of edge detection for a
profile cut-off Pi
Length pitch
delta
Enter the length L of the delta.
Lc-W*
= upper band-pass cut-off length
It applies that: h = L * tanφ (see Figure 3-46: Principle
diagram of pitch delta on the P*-profile).
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
Input topic
Description
Specify a cut-off filter Lc to calculate the profile W*.
Lf-W*
= lower band pass cut-off to remove a certain basic form
(e.g. for removing crowning)
e.g.: Lt/2 (frequency range for W*: Lf-Lc)
Enter a value. The filter does not become active until the
function is activated.
Ls-P*
Cut-off for noise suppression in the P*-profile
The roughness ratio up to this specified cut-off is removed (0 to Ls).
Enter a value. The filter does not become active until the
function is activated.
Evaluation range
=> only for type
e)
The input boxes for n, φ, R and L are not active for an
edge of type e).
The primary profile P is then determined by the beginning and end of an evaluation range. This function does
not represent a real edge detection but only a selection
of P from P*.
3.8.2.4 Setting polynomial fit
Open the Polynom tab in the program sequence menu. The polynomial fit function represents a mathematical filter process for filtering
uneven profile traces.
With the polynomial fit function, a polynomial with the set factor (1st to
10th order) is calculated with the recorded P-profile directly after profile recording.
A synthetic profile is calculated from the n calculated coefficients (e.g.
1 to 8) and subtracted from the recorded P-profile. The resulting difference profile is shown as a new P-profile and can be edited with all
evaluation functions (Filters, Align, Fourier analysis etc.).
The higher the selected polynomial factor, the finer the polynomial fit
fits the master P-profile.
Activate the "Polynomial ON" function if the profile is to be straightened with the polynomial fit after the measurement. Enter the desired
polynomial factor between 1 and 10 in the input box.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-57
Settings
Polynom fit
Figure 3-49: Polynom fit settings
With the function switched on, the P-profile is calculated automatically
with the calculated polynomial and the resulting profile is shown in the
diagram.
Application example
Printing roller
1. A P-profile is recorded radially on a printing roller:
th
2. After the profile recording, the polynomial fit function is applied (10 order):
The radius of the printing roller is filtered perfectly!
3. Since the P profile is now straightened, an R profile with a cut-off filter of
2.5 mm can be calculated from it.
3-58
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
3.8.3 Program sequence contour evaluation
3.8.3.1 CONTOUR evaluation
For handling profile data with the contour evaluation integrated in
TURBO WAVE the type of evaluation is defined at the end of a measuring run in the Contour tab in the Program sequence menu.
Figure 3-50: Contour evaluation settings
Type of
evaluation
Description
none
The contour evaluation must be opened manually with F11 at
the end of the measuring run.
manual
At the end of the measuring run the TURBO WAVE software
changes automatically to the CONTOUR evaluation window.
This window must then be closed manually!
semiautomatic
At the end of the measuring run the TURBO WAVE software
goes automatically to the CONTOUR evaluation window and
runs an auto-evaluation if available.
This window then has to be closed manually!
automatic
At the end of the measuring run, the TURBO WAVE software
goes automatically to the CONTOUR evaluation window and
runs an auto-evaluation. Then this window closes automatically
and TURBO WAVE returns to the screen form. There you can
view the measuring results in the CONTOUR graphic.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-59
3.8.3.2 Profile export to TURBO CONTOUR
The measuring results from TURBO WAVE can be transferred to the
separate, independent TURBO CONTOUR software program for contour evaluation.
After a measurement has been performed and saved, you will be able
to save the profile as a *.pmr file (profile files) by means of the "Export
profile to TURBO CONTOUR" function.
The settings for profile transfer are assigned to the measuring program
and are made in the Profile => TURBO CONTOUR tab in the Program
sequence menu. Parameters evaluated in TURBO CONTOUR can be
displayed and evaluated again using the "Parameters TURBO
CONTOUR" form object in TURBO WAVE (see chapter 3.3.4).
Figure 3-51: Profile export to TURBO CONTOUR
3-60
Dialog box topic
Description
Save PMR file
Activate this checkbox because only then will the
communication files for TURBO CONTOUR be created.
Exit TURBO
CONTOUR after
profile evaluation
Activate this function is the TURBO CONTOUR software is to be exited again after automatic profile
evaluation.
Measuring program TURBO
CONTOUR
Select the measuring program on the hard disk with
[Change] which is to be loaded with TURBO
CONTOUR for evaluation of the profile
Parameter file 1st
profile for assembled profiles
If this function is activated the current profile is assembled with a saved profile in an overall profile for the
st
contour evaluation. This saved profile (1 profile) is
also selected from the hard disk with [Change].
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Program sequence
With the menu View/TURBO CONTOUR the TURBO CONTOUR
software installed on the same PC is started with the current profile for
evaluation. The other evaluations are made directly in this software
(see own documentation).
Start profile export
The function "Save parameters and profile" (Autosave) in the "Parameter
file" tab must be activated first.
Important
3.8.4 Special functions
3.8.4.1 Conductor measurement
The conductor measurement is a customer-specific function and is
described in a separate documentation.
3.8.4.2 SUMEQ-AGRECAP
SUMEQ-AGRECAP is a customer-specific function and is described in
a separate documentation.
3.8.4.3 Levelling
The levelling function is a customer-specific function and is described
in a separate documentation.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-61
3.9 Documenting and archiving measuring results
3.9.1 Printout form
3.9.1.1 General
The results are documented in the screen form directly after the
measurement.
To printout the measuring results and evaluations as a quality record,
a printout form can be designed. This form may be identical with the
screen form or it may have totally different contents. The printout form
is created automatically along with the screen form (both empty) in a
new measuring program.
When loading a measuring program, the printout form will automatically be opened.
You can design the layout of the printout form just as you need it, as
you can the screen form. From the "View" menu choose "Printout
form". The current printout form is displayed and can be edited.
The function key and menu bars look like this in the printout form:
F1
Call the online help.
F9
Call the Windows printer dialog
box
F12
Exit the printout form view and return to the screen form
You will find an overview of the menu commandsin subsection Printout
form, page 3-8.
3.9.1.2 Inserting form objects
The "Form" menu allows you to create and set up all the form elements of the screen form for the printout form as well.
If you want to take over elements from the screen form directly, mark
these elements in the screen form and copy them into the clipboard to
paste them into the printout form.
If the printout form is to match the screen form exactly, you can simply
copy over the contents of the screen form. To do this select all objects
in the screen form and copy them with CTRL+C. Go to the printout
form and paste the copied objects there with CTRL+V.
3-62
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Documenting and archiving measuring results
3.9.1.3 Set up page layout
To design the program printout, the printout pages and the printer
must have been set up. The page margins can be adjusted to set up
the printout form on the print page.
Open the following dialog box with the "Setup page" menu (Printout
form menu):
Figure 3-52: Set up print page dialog box
Input topic
Description
Page margins
Enter the page margins (distance from report frame to
edge of paper). (=> subsection Defining the detail section, page 3-65 section 1)
Header and footer
Activate these functions when a header and or footer
are to be displayed in the report. (=> subsection
Defining the detail section, page 3-65 section 2a)
All objects in these sections are repeated and printed
on every page.
Distance from
margin
Enter a desired distance from the page margin for
header and footer (if activated) (then corresponds to
the height of the header and footer). (=> subsection
Defining the detail section, page 3-65 section 2a)
Detail section...
The detail section is the first printing area (repeat area)
of Multiprint Determine the beginning and end (absolutely starting from the page margin) for this section.
(=> subsection Defining the detail section , page 3-65,
section 3 to 4)
(only for Multiprint)
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-63
You will find an illustration of all the settings from this dialog box in
Figure 3-54.
Text for headers
and footers
The "Text" form is used for displaying text in headers and footers.
Full page view
Select the full page view to check the page layout. Choose "Page
view" from the "Printout form" menu. The page view can be represented and printed ("Printout" menu item) magnified (i.e. zoomed in)
or reduced (i.e. zoomed out).
With the Page number form object the actual page number is displayed in the header and footer on each new page when several
pages are printed.
Figure 3-53: Full page view printout form
Printer setup
Before printing a new or modified measuring report you should check
the printer setup and update it as required. This applies particularly to
the printing format to be selected which must be identical with the format of the printout form.
Set up the printer from the "Printout form" menu (printout form view) or
the " Measuring program" menu (screen form view).
3.9.2 Multiprint
3.9.2.1 General
The "Multiprint" function enables the representation of several measurements in one print form. These may be consecutively performed
3-64
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
measurements but also saved measurements in any order which are
loaded into the Multiprint printout form.
For this representation, a detail section (repetition section) is defined
which can include 1 to 8 objects (form fields). Then Multiprint distributes this section as often as possible over the first page of the printout
form and fills these sections according to a defined sequence after
every measurement.
Depending on the setting, the measurements are inserted in the printout form consecutively and automatically or in a freely selectable order
(Multiprint printing position). Up to 8 measurements can be positioned
on one printout.
The "Multiprint" function is usable at all user levels.
The "Multiprint printing" position function is only available in the Measure & Evaluate and Create measuring program modes.
3.9.2.2 Activate Multiprint
To provide the Multiprint function in measurement mode, this must be
activated in the "Create measuring program" mode (F7 main menu).
To do this, select the Multiprint command in the Printout form
menu. A check mark is set in front of the command when the Multiprint
function is active.
With this setting, the individual measurements are inserted automatically one after another in the printout form in measurement mode. The
report is printed out automatically as soon as the page is complete.
Then the Multiprint memory is emptied and filled again with the next
measurements.
3.9.2.3 Defining the detail section
After Multiprint has been activated, several horizontal rulers appear on
the printout form which have handlers (triangles on the left ruler scale,
see the following graphic ).
Pos. 1 in the following graphic designates the upper edge of the paper.
The next ruler (pos. 2 in the following graphic) marks the respective
page margin according to the setting in the Page setup" dialog box.
Pos. 2a marks the end of the header (if set up). This also applies for
the footer (not illustrated).
The next two rulers (pos. 3 and 4 in the following graphic ) show the
beginning and end of the detail section (1st repetition section of Multiprint). The larger this section, the fewer measurements can be printed
in the report at the same time.
All other rulers (pos. 5 in the following graphic) indicate how often the
set detail section (repeat section) can be arranged on a printout page.
These rulers cannot be moved because they depend directly on the
position of the rulers 3 and 4.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-65
All objects between item 2a and 3 belong to the report header and
only appear once in the later printout (useful for report header, logo
and similar).
To move a ruler, click the appropriate triangle with the left mouse button and move it to the desired position with the mouse button held
down. The set dimensions are transferred to the "Page setup" dialog
automatically. You can also enter exact dimensions in the dialog box
to place the rulers.
Figure 3-54: Multiprint - Page setup
The printout form may not contain any other evaluation elements below
the bottom limit of the detail section (pos. 4 in the graphic) because
these are not deleted automatically when printing but are overlapped by
the elements contained in the Multiprint!
3.9.2.4 Multiprint printing functions
Multiprint pages
>= 2
If this function is active, the form header (section between pos. 2a and
3 in the graphic 3-65) is only printed on the first page when Multiprint
pages are printed out. All other pages only contain the Multiprint printing sections.
Print pages >= 2...
All pages are printed without form headers (assuming that the 1 page
is already printed)
3-66
st
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
The next page is printed with header and page number 1 again. (Reset the previous command Print >=2...)
Multiprint Reset
If the individual measurements are to be placed at specific points in the Multiprint printout
position
measuring report, the "Multiprint position" function must be activated
additionally in the "Printout form" menu. After every measurement you
can select in which concrete repetition section the current measuring results and/or evaluations are to be displayed or printed. To do this a dialog window is opened for selecting the desired section.
The sections available within
the print page (max. 8) are
listed here.
To select the desired position,
click it and confirm with OK.
The print position status is
shown in the right column.
Figure 3-55: Multiprint print position
The first print section (position 1) is always activated automatically, if it
is empty!
Note
However, if another print position has been selected, the measurement
will be represented twice.
If the "Multiprint print position" function is inactive, the engagement
sequence of the printout section will automatically be allocated.
3.9.2.5 Delete measurement from Multiprint
Using the "Delete measurement from Multiprint" command in the
"Printout form" menu, particular measurements can be deleted from
the Multiprint memory. The following dialog is opened:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-67
Figure 3-56: Delete measurement from Multiprint
Attention!
After the first page has been completely filled with measurements, Multiprint will automatically print out.
When the next measurement takes place, all previous measurements will
be deleted from the Multiprint memory.
3.9.3 Saving a measuring program
After a new measuring program has been completely created or an existing one has been edited, the document will be ready to be closed
and saved in a file.
To close and save an active measuring program you can choose the
"Close", "Save" or "Save as..." option from the "Measuring program"
menu or click on function key F4 or F12 on the function key bar.
Choose the "Close" command or click on F12 to close the active
screen form and the associated printout form.
A security prompt appears asking whether you want to save as yet
unsaved data. By clicking the [No] button, the newly created measuring program is closed followed by the return to the main menu without
saving any data.
On the other hand, if you click the [Yes] button, the "Save as" dialog
box will be opened in order to save the document. This window will
also be opened if you select the "Save as" function or if you press F2.
3-68
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Figure 3-57: Save measuring program
The measuring program can be saved under a freely selectable name
or an already existing measuring program is overwritten by the edited
data.
Choose [Cancel] to cancel the save operation and return to the screen
form.
3.9.4 Deleting a measuring program
To delete a measuring program, open the Windows Explorer and delete the measuring program from the hard disk.
3.9.5 Exiting the "Create measuring program" mode
Click on function key F12 or choose "Close" from the "Measuring program" menu to quit "Create measuring program" mode and return to
the main menu of TURBO WAVE.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
3-69
User levels
4 Adjustment and measuring
4.1 User levels
4.1.1 General
To get the most accurate measuring results the workpiece must be
aligned mechanically with the probe and the probe signal adapted to
the TURBO WAVE software or the evaluation unit (HOMMEL
TESTER) controlled by it.
To prevent the probe signal from exceeding the preset measuring
range during the measuring run owing to excessive deflection of the
stylus, you should first carry out an adjustment run and, where necessary, a mechanical adjustment.
Connected CAN-bus device components are searched for and detected when calling the adjustment window. Axes can be traversed
manually which is necessary for setting up a measuring program.
The measurement mode alone can always be performed in all user
levels. The levels differ in their function scope and access rights (see
subsection Password settings, page 2-19).
F5
Measure user level (limited scope of functions)
F6
Measure + Evaluate user level (full scope of functions)
F7
Create measuring program user level (full scope of functions)
Basically the complete scope of adjustment and measuring functions
can also be used in the "Create measuring program" mode. However,
in the real production environment, we advise you to restrict operation
to the "Measure + Evaluate" mode with a password so that measuring
programs are not changed accidentally.
Therefore only the differences between levels II and III are dealt with
below. The functions of creating and editing measuring programs are
described in detail in subsection Create measuring program.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-1
Adjustment and measuring
4.1.1.1 Scope of functions in the "Measure" mode
The restricted user level "Measure" is designed above all for use in
production.
The user can make adjustments and measurements, load, align and
save profiles and create measuring reports with a selected measuring
program. Other evaluations cannot be performed manually.
The measuring program is configured beforehand by a qualified user
to suit the production application.
Auto evaluations stored in the measuring program can be performed
and saved automatically when these options are switched on in the
measuring program.
The following functions are available for the user in restricted measuring mode:
•
Load a measuring program (only possible from the directory preset in
the measuring program from the hard disk)
•
Adjustment mode with all functions (calibrate probe signal, measure,
zero probe signal, align, load and save profile)
•
Adapt measuring conditions temporarily
•
Measure/Start CNC run
•
•
Save profile
•
Align profile
•
Print
•
Make entries in the company header
4.1.1.2 Scope of functions in the "Measure and Evaluate" mode
The Measure + Evaluate user level contains all the functions of the
Measure level. In addition, temporary changes can also be made in
the program sequence in extended measuring mode. Creating and editing measuring programs can be prevented by a different password
for the "Create measuring program" level.
The following functions are additionally available in the extended
measuring mode:
4-2
•
Load a measuring program from anywhere on the hard disk
•
Temporary change in the measuring conditions and the program run
(option: Save measuring programs)
•
Load, display and evaluate (profile analysis, Fourier analysis...) a profile measured with the selected measuring program
•
Export profiles (ASCII, QS-STAT, option: SUMEQ-AGRECAP)
•
Perform contour evaluation
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
User levels
4.1.1.3 Scope of functions in the "Create measuring program
mode"
In the Create measuring program mode, adjustment and measuring
processes can also be performed. This level includes all the functions
of the "Measure and Evaluate" level and the scope of the Create
measuring program level described in subsection Create measuring
program.
4.1.2 Start program
4.1.2.1 Call measuring program
The right measuring program must be loaded first to make a measurement. This process differs in the different user levels.
After starting the TURBO WAVE program, a measuring program for
measure mode is called from the main menu as follows :
•
with the function key F5 (Measure mode)
•
with the function key F6 (Measure + Evaluate mode)
or
•
with the menu Options, command mode....
The measuring programs can only be loaded from the main menu. Open
measuring programs need not be closed until another measuring program can be loaded!
Attention
In principle, measuring and adjustment processes can be also be performed in the Create measuring program mode. However, a lot of
functions are then made available which are not needed for mere
measuring and evaluation.
The access to the "Measure + Evaluate" mode can be protected by a
password. The password protection and the definition and changing of
passwords is activated in the Setup menu(see subsection Password settings, page 2-19).
Note
In the Measure mode the following dialog box is opened to load a
measuring program:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-3
Figure 4-1: Load measuring program (Measure mode)
TURBO WAVE always accesses the folder for measuring programs
entered in the Setup menu. A measuring program can only be loaded
from this folder in the "Measure" mode!
In the extended Measure + Evaluate mode the dialog has another
button [Search]:
This opens the Windows file dialog box in which measuring programs
can be loaded from any hard disk directory.
4-4
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
User levels
Figure 4-2: Load measuring program (Measure + Evaluate mode)
Select the measuring program you want and confirm with [OK]. The
measuring program is opened and displayed in the screen form.
4.1.3 Operating functions in the Measure + Evaluate
mode
4.1.3.1 Function key bar
Figure 4-3: Function key bar in the "Measure + Evaluate" mode
F1
Call help function
F2
F7
Open the dialog box to set the
measuring conditions
F8
F3
Load a saved profile
F9
Print report (change to printed
report view)
F4
Save current profile
F10
Open profile analysis window
F5
Start measurement (optional: start CNC run)
F11
Open contour evaluation window
F6
Go to adjustment window
F12
Close active measuring program => return to main menu
If the function key F5 is not selectable (grey), go to the adjustment window first with F6 and then back with F12 to initialise the connected device components.
Note
4.1.3.2 Menu overview screen form
Command
Description
Close
A measuring program is closed and references are
made to any changes which have not yet been saved.
TURBO WAVE returns to the main menu.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Menu Measuring
program
4-5
Command
Description
Print screen
form
Print out the contents of the screen form.
Print printout
form
Print the printout form content
Print file
This command opens the "Profile" window and loads
the profile selected there into the Multiprint memory.
=> The function is only available when Multiprint has
been activated!
Profile menu
The functions in the "Profile" menu serve to edit measured or saved
profiles (e.g. important for twist measurement, topography).
Command
Description
Load profile...
(F4)
A saved profile is opened and displayed in the screen
form (in the profile graphics or in the parameter list).
Delete profiles of
active measurement position
All profiles of the active measurement position (see
also measurement position management with test plan
editor) are deleted.
Delete profiles of
all measurement
positions
All profiles of all measurement positions are deleted
(see also measurement position management with test
plan editor).
Save measurement results (F3)
The measurement results of the current measurement
are saved in a parameter file (*.hwh or *.par).
Delete saved
measurement
(F8):
Delete the last profile from a profile file or delete the
whole profile file.
Export QSSTAT:
The export function to QS-STAT for the saved parameter file is started. (=> subsection Export QS-STAT, page 3-46)
Import profile
Smd
SMD = standardised data exchange format for profiles
according to DIN ISO 5438, part2
Export profile
Smd
External profiles can be read with TURBO WAVE or
TURBO WAVE profiles exported for other applications.
Import profile
ASCII:
A previously saved profile in ASCII format is imported
to TURBO WAVE for display and evaluation. The
ASCII profile must have been saved with
TURBO WAVE or have the same structure!
Export profile
ASCII:
4-6
The measured values of the loaded profile are saved in
ASCII format (*.asc) and can be opened and viewed
with any editor.
Export SUMEQAGRECAP
(OPTION):
The optional software package TRSAG must be installed for this (customer option).
Align (F11):
The profile is aligned over Lt (total traverse length).
Re-compute file
The current profile can be re-computed with different
measuring conditions and the new result profile then
saved separately.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
User levels
Command
Description
Twist calculation
(option)
The software calculates those twist data from the profiles specified in the measuring program which are
subsequently necessary for the twist evaluation with
the HOMMEL MAP software.
This process produces no visible result! The determined results are saved internally and transferred as
parameters when calling HOMMEL MAP.
Command
Description
Adjustment [F6]:
The software moves to the adjustment window.
Measure (F5)*
The software moves to the measurement mode.
Edit menu
* - depending on the setting in the program run F5
starts the following process:
•
normal measurement
•
automatic CNC run
•
twist measurement
•
topography capture
Start CNC program
The automatic CNC run is started.
Import company
header
The File dialog box is opened to import a company
header (*.kop) saved on the hard disk into the current
measuring program.
Command
Description
Measuring conditions (F7):
The dialog box for defining the measuring conditions is
opened.
Program sequence
A dialog box for settings for the program sequence, the
topography, the CNC run and other special functions is
opened.
Measurement
position
The dialog box for selecting a measurement position is
opened. All measurement positions are available which
have been created previously in the measurement position editor in the Create measuring program mode.
CNC Editor
The CNC Editor for editing the CNC run is opened.
(=>subsection Functional description of the CNC
commands, page 9-2)
Command
Description
Printout form
Switch from screen form view to printout form view and
back with the "Screen form" command.
Profile analysis
The Profile analysis window is opened.
Contour evaluation (F11)
The selection window for evaluation with TURBO
CONTOUR is opened.
Topographic a-
The HOMMEL MAP software is opened and the profile
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Menu
Settings
Menu
View
4-7
Command
Description
analysis
surface displayed.
TURBO
CONTOUR
The separate TURBO CONTOUR program is opened
for contour evaluation.
OPTION:
The HOMMEL MAP software is opened and the twist
profile displayed.
Twist evaluation
OPTION:
Customer option
Levelling
Menu
Window
Screen and printout forms can be displayed in different views (cascade, tile).
4.1.3.3 Menu overview printout form
Menu
Printout form
Command
Description
Page view
The whole page view is displayed (print preview).
Print
Print printout form
Print setup
is opened.
Multiprint
activates/deactivates the Multiprint function
Multiprint
When this function is activated, any free repetition
range in the Multiprint memory can be occupied for the
current measurement (automatic assignment is cancelled).
Print position
Multiprint >= 2
The form header is only printed once on the first page
when printing Multiprint forms.
Delete measurement from
One or more arbitrary measurements can be deleted
from the Multiprint menu
Multiprint
Print
Pages >=2...
All pages of the Multiprint form are printed without
header (on the assumption that the 1st page with the
header has already been printed).
Multiprint Reset
The next page is printed with header and page number
1 again. (reset the command 'Print pages >=2')
Print Multiprint
automatically
The pages of the Multiprint form are printed automatically without prompting after being filled in completely.
The explanations to the other menus in the printout form can be taken
from the descriptions of the screen form (see subsection Menu overview screen form, page 4-5).
4-8
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Reference run
4.2 Reference run
4.2.1 Open the adjustment window
From the screen form, click on function key F6 to switch to adjustment
mode. The adjustment window is opened.
First the software checks whether and which wavesystem components
are connected. This test may last several seconds!
The connected devices are displayed in the adjustment window after
this test.
Fig. 4-4: Control and display unit for wavesystem components
After restarting TURBO WAVE a reference run is requested the first
time the adjustment window opens (see subsection Reference run,
page 4-9).
A measuring run can only be started with F5 from the screen form when
the adjustment window has been called first and the wavesystem components initialised.
Note
4.2.2 Automatic reference run
If TURBO WAVE has been restarted a reference run must be performed to initialise the movement axes after the first opening of the adjustment window. This process starts automatically.
The software automatically searches for wavesystem components
connected to the system. All components found are then requested to
the reference run one after another with the following message:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-9
Figure 4-5: Request automatic reference run wavesystem
Press the [Select all devices] button or select a single device for the
reference run. Activate or deactivate the checkboxes in the first column in front of the device to do this.
Attention
Danger of collision!
Always check whether the travel of all reference run axes is clear for
both measuring stations first to avoid collisions! Only then should the
reference run be started!
If the axis paths are free, press the [Start reference run] button => the
reference run starts automatically.
If the axis paths are not clear, press the [Cancel] button => the dialog
box is closed and you can move the axes manually to a safe position.
Then you have to start the reference run manually Proceed as described in the following subsection.
The reference run can be aborted at any time with F11 (Stop icon).
The "Status" column tells you when a reference run for an axis has
been completed successfully.
Note
For devices that are not connected to the CAN-bus system (e.g. Y positioners), the reference run must always be started manually!
4.2.3 Manual reference run
The reference run can be also be started manually individually for all
axes at any time.
4-10
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Adjustment functions
Work steps:
1. Call the Properties dialog box of the axis (see adjustment graphic, Figure
4-6). (mouseclick on the icon opens the dialog box)
2. Press the button for Start reference run in the Target positioning tab.
3. Then confirm the security prompt for clear axis path with [OK] if the path is
clear. Otherwise the axis must be moved to a safe position first and the
reference run restarted.
The reference run is performed now.
The reference run can be aborted at any time with F11 (Stop icon).
A reference run can be started alternatively with the "Reference run"
menu.
The "Reference run ended" message appears in the status bar of the
control and display unit of each component as soon as the reference
run has been completed successfully.
4.3 Adjustment functions
4.3.1 Adjustment window
4.3.1.1 Elements in the adjustment window
0
1a
1
8
4
1
5
4
2
Figure 4-6:
3
Adjustment window
6
7
In this example three wavesystem components have been recognised
automatically and the appropriate control and display units shown.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-11
Pos.
Description
0
Function key bar (see also Figure 4-7, page 4-12)
1
Probe position indicators
1a
Slide controller for offset setting
2
Control and display units for all connected components
3
Y positioner forward and reverse
4
Traverses the column up and down
5
Traverse unit forward and reverse
6
Extended function key bar (see also Figure 4-8, page 4-12)
7
Setting the positioning speed of the axes
8
Overview display of the measured profile (update during the
measuring run)
4.3.1.2 Toolbars in the adjustment window
There are two toolbars in the adjustment window which can be
operated by the function keys.
Main functions
Figure 4-7: Adjustment window toolbar
F1
Call help function
F2
F3
F7
F8
Rough alignment (by tilt
unit or automatically with
wavetilt)
F4
Auto zero
F9
F10
F5
Start measuring run (optional: Start CNC run)
F11
Cancels a measuring run
F6
Traverse unit reverse
F12
Exit adjustment window/ Return
to screen form
Extended
functions
Figure 4-8: Extended toolbar in the adjustment window
4-12
F1
Move to reference point of
the X axis (waveline)
F2
the Z axis (wavelift)
F3
the Y axis (wavestep)
F7
Remove a profile offset
F10
Determine probe factor
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Adjustment functions
F4
Move to wavetilt reference
point
F12
Determine probe height "h"
F5
rotary table
1...4
Speed steps for axis movement
F6
Zeroing the residual probe
value
Jog mode for speeds ON/OFF
(5)
The extended functions are controlled with the Shift+Function key
combination or by mouseclick!
4.3.1.3 Menu overview
Command
Description
Start measuring
run (F5)
An adjustment measuring run is started. The CNC
run starts in option CNC.
Stop measuring
run (F11)
The measuring run is aborted and all movements are
stopped.
Menu
Adjustment
Alternative commands:
F11 (Stop icon) or Space key (keyboard)
Align (F2)
The profile from the last adjustment measuring run is
aligned.
Rough align (F3)
An adjustment measuring run is started which supplies a numeric value as a result for mechanical
alignment of the traverse unit by means of the mechanical tilt unit.
Autozero (F8)
The Z axis (measuring column) is moved to probe
signal = 0 (probe centre).
Move to X/Z/Y/C
reference point
(Shift+F1/F2/F3/F4)
The reference position of the respective component
is moved to. This position is entered in the Properties
dialog box.
Reverse traverse
unit (F6)
The linear traverse unit (LV) is positioned at its defined return position (see Settings tab, page 3-49 =>
Return functions).
Residual zero
(Shift+F5)
The probe value is temporarily set to zero. The absolute value is not changed! (see also subsection Zero
probe residual value, page 4-17)
Profile offset
(Shift+F6)
The profile is moved to the zero line in Z direction and
any existing offset is removed.
Calibration functions for the contour measurement:
Further information about the calibration processes
can be found in subsection Compensation and
calibration, page 10-1
Gain factor
(Shift+F10)
A calibration process (dialog-guided wizard) is started
to determine the probe factor.
Calibration run
(Shift+F12)
A calibration process (dialog-guided) wizard is started
to determine the stylus height.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-13
Menu
Reference run
Reference run wavelift/
waveline/ wavecontour/
wavestep X,Y/ wavetilt
A reference run is started for the respectively
selected component.
Lift wavecontour
The probe arm of the wavecontour probe is
lifted from the workpiece surface.
Lower wavecontour
The probe arm of the wavecontour probe is
lowered onto the workpiece surface.
4.4 Axis positioning
4.4.1 Operating variants
The individual moving axes (measuring column, linear traverse unit,
positioner, probe etc.) can be positioned in different ways.
You have the following possibilities:
•
PC keyboard (numeric block, cursor keys)
•
Click on the arrow symbols in the graphic in theadjustment window
(see Figure 4-6)
•
Move to exactly defined reference positions (input and positioning in
the Properties dialog box of the measuring station components)
4.4.1.1 Axis positioning by PC keyboard
Various keys (number block, cursor keys) of the PC keyboard can be
used for manual axis positioning.
Move wavelift up/down
Cursor
up / down
Move waveline left/right
Cursor
left / right
Home / End
Y positioner back / forward
Page up / Page down
Lift/lower wavecontour
Plus "+" , Minus "-"
Move wavelift up/down
Division sign "/"
Move waverotor left/right
Multiplication sign "*"
4.4.1.2 Axis positioning with icon buttons
Click on the appropriate arrow buttons in the adjustment window. You
can see the current axis position in the display unit for the respective
wavesystem component.
4-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Axis positioning
4.4.1.3 Target positioning
For moving to an exact target position the Target positioning function
in the Properties dialog of every wavesystem device is used (see subsection Target positioning, page 4-18).
4.4.2 Positioning speeds
4.4.2.1 General
Four speed levels are available for axis movement (from 1=low to
4=high). The speed levels are set numerically or using the jog function.
For probes with a small measuring range the levels 3 and 4 are only
available in conjunction with the CTRL key (see also subsection
Probe protection function, page 4-16). In normal operation the speed
levels 3 and 4 in these probes behave exactly the same as level 2.
4.4.2.2 Numeric setting
Function buttons serve for setting the speed level (arranged next to
the extended toolbar):
These four levels can selected in any order as follows:
•
by a mouseclick
•
with the numeric keys 1-4 of the PC keyboard
Then the axes can be moved manually at the selected speed.
You may not use the number block of the PC keyboard for numeric selection of the speed!
Note
4.4.2.3 Setting with the jog function
The setting of speed levels using the jog function is based on repeated
pressing of a key which starts a movement. Movement only takes
place for as long as this key is pressed.
Activate the jog function by pressing the icon next to it or selecting
numeric key 5.
The jog function is active when the icon button is pressed. Then position the desired axis with the keyboard or a mouseclick on the graphic.
All four speed levels can be used. To reach a higher speed level the
respective key (or arrow button) must be pressed several times in
rapid succession (one, two, three or four times).
The currently active speed level is displayed additionally with the numeric buttons (active level is shown pressed).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-15
4.4.3 Display probe position
The current probe position is displayed by an adjustment bar in the left
of the adjustment window:
(1) Graphically
The current probe position and the
movement of the probe are represented graphically on the adjustment
bar by the symbol. Full deflection of
the scale corresponds to the set
measuring range.
1
(2) Absolute value [µm]
2
The absolute position of the probe
relative to zero is given in [µm].
3
(3) Percentage value [%]
The probe position is given as a percentage of the preset measuring range
in [%].
4.4.4 Probe protection function
Rigid reference level pick ups especially can be quickly destroyed by
carelessness or improper handling when moving the wavelift measuring column.
For this reason, the positioning speed of the measuring column has been
adapted to the tracing systems used. In probes with a small stroke (e.g.
TKL 100) only a reduced positioning speed can be driven (max. level 2)
whilst a higher speed is released for use of the contour probes.
As soon as the probe is in the selected measuring range, the speed is
automatically reduced to the lowest level in order to protect the probe
from damage.
Attention
The reduced positioning speed can be deactivated by pressing the key
combination "CTRL + arrow key" if positioning without risk of collision
is possible in uncritical areas.
Attention
When using a wavelift measuring column in connection with the remote
control of the HOMMEL TESTER T6000 from the PC, the measuring column reacts with a delay of about 500 ms to manual movement commands from the PC!
This delay must be taken into account when manually positioning the Zaxis in order to prevent probe damage (to roughness probes).
4-16
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
wavesystem components
4.4.5 Zero probe residual value
Difference formation of probe positions:
The "Zero residual probe value" function is activated with Shift+F6 on
the extended toolbar.
When the function is switched on, the appropriate icon is displayed to
the right of the graphic probe position display and the probe value is
set graphically and numerically to zero. This is only a temporary display which does not change the absolute probe value!
This function allows easy formation of the difference between two
probe positions, as the distance can be read directly (e.g. in two gauge
block positions).
1. Position the probe at the first position.
Work steps
2. Activate the "Zero residual probe value" function.
3. Position the probe at the second position.
4. Read off the difference directly.
5. Deactivate the "Zero residual probe value" function with Shift+F7.
4.5 wavesystem components
4.5.1 Introduction
Each wavesystem component has a control and display panel in the
adjustment window. Click on the relevant icon button to open a
Properties dialog box for the component concerned. In the dialog box
you can set and approach reference positions and limit switches.
Pos.
Description
1
The appropriate Properties dialog box opens when you click the
mouse on the icon of the respective device.
2
The position bar displays the current position of the device graphill (
tt
b l
th
b l)
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-17
Pos.
Description
cally (next to or below the symbol).
3
The displayed number indicates the current position of the device in
absolute values.
➜ This value is displayed dynamically during an axis movement
4
The current axis status is displayed in the status bar.
5
The respective displayed icon is a graphic representation of the current movement status
➜ Stop or direction arrow or reference run icon: for column and
traverse unit
➜ blue arrow: for probe movement up / down
4.5.2 Settings wavesystem
4.5.2.1 Target positioning
Fig. 4-9: Target positioning wavesystem devices
Outside the Properties dialogs the set reference positions can also be
moved to directly in the adjustment window with these two buttons in
the extended toolbar.
Input topic
Remark
Presetting a
target position:
Presetting a target position permits precise positioning of the axes to preset values.
Type your desired target position in [mm] in the input
box.
Leave the dialog box by pressing [OK] or the Enter
key.
4-18
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Input topic
Remark
➜ The wavesystem component then positions automatically to the preset position
Presetting a
reference position
The reference position is any position within the permissible positioning range (between the preset limit
switches). It serves as a mark for repeat measurements. This omits a repeated manual target position.
Work steps:
1. Type your desired reference position in [mm] in the
input box.
2. Click on the [Set reference] button.
Click on the [Accept] button.
3. Click on [OK] to confirm the following security
prompt for overwriting the existing reference position.
➜ The entered value is transferred to the "Ref.Pos."
box
Offset for reference position
Entering an offset value allows you to define an additional setting, differing from the reference position, to
be able temporarily to approach different reference
positions for example.
Work steps:
1. Preset a reference position first.
2. Enter a value again and press the button [Calculate
offset].
➜ The new value is entered under "Ref+Offs"
➜ The difference between both values is calculated
as an offset value and entered under "Offset"
Start reference run
A reference run is started for the selected axis.
After a security prompt whether the axis path is clear,
the axes are moved to the appropriate limit switches
and the axes initialised.
wavelift ➜ upper limit switch
waveline ➜ left limit switch
to zero position
The selected axis moves to the previously defined
and saved reference position.
(≠ limit switch position of the reference run!!)
Fast positioning
Function inactive:
As soon as the probe is in the set measuring range,
the traverse speed is reduced considerably
➜ High positioning accuracy, increased positioning
time!
Function activated ( ):
When the specified destination position is reached
the motor is simply shut off.
➜ Short positioning time, lower positioning accuracy!
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-19
Input topic
Remark
Lift wavecontour automatically
(only for wavecontour)
When the function is activated the wavecontour
probe is lifted automatically from the workpiece surface before positioning and after the measuring run.
4.5.2.2 Limit switch (generally valid)
On this tab in the Properties dialog box you can set and approach the
limit switches of the devices concerned.
Figure 4-10: Properties dialog box Limit switch general
There is an input box for every possible limit switch.
Note
Work steps
Limit switches saved in waveline are automatically transferred to the
setting dialog box of TURBO WAVE as a result of the CAN bus. These
can then be reset there. The values in the waveline are thereby overwritten and adopted in the device. Press the Enter key on the waveline traverse unit to update its display.
1. Enter a new value in the "Nominal" input box.
2. Press the [Save] button.
➜ The new value is adopted as an "actual value"
3. Click on the [Position] button or quit the dialog box by pressing the Enter key to approach the limit switch position stored as the "actual".
Note: This limit switch position is only moved to, however, if the limit
switch is on the right of the current waveline position!
4-20
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
4.5.2.3 Limit switch for wavecontour probe arm
When a wavecontour probe is used, the probe arm limit (stroke monitoring) is set by the limit switch property.
Figure 4-11: Control and display box for wavecontour
Open the Properties dialog box and enter the appropriate values here:
Figure 4-12: Setting the limit switches of the wavecontour probe
The limit switches for the probe arm itself are generated automatically
from the maximum possible probe arm stroke (see also on the About
tab of the Properties dialog box) and are adopted by the software as
actual values. The [Save] button is inactive.
You can nevertheless set different limit switches for special application
cases in order to limit the probe stroke (e.g. measurement in bores).
1. Enter a new nominal value in the input box.
Work steps
2. Press the key combination CTRL + SHIFT + cursor key
("↑" for the upper limit switch, "↓" for the lower limit switch) to save the
value as an actual value
3. Click on the [Position] button to approach the new limit switch.
4.5.2.4 Device information
All the details of the respective components are displayed on the "Info"
tab.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-21
Figure 4-13: Properties dialog box Device information
4.5.2.5 Autozero setup wavelift
On the "Autozero setup" tab you set the parameters for automatic lowering of the tracing system onto the workpiece surface.
Figure 4-14: Settings wavelift - autozero setup
4-22
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Measuring run adjustment
Parameter
Description
Offset [mm]
Enter a distance to which you want position relative to
the actual probe zero position, e.g. 0.200 [mm]
Starting speed
[mm/s]
Enter a start speed for the positioning process "Autozero".
➜ If the scanning system is close to the destination,
the speed reduces automatically!
Maximum distance
[mm]
Input a safety distance to protect the tracing system.
➜ The probe zero position must be reached within this
distance (relative to the current start position).
Important!!
Note sign!!
Negative => column moves down
Positive => column moves up
When this maximum distance has been run the autozero process is automatically aborted.
To deactivate a parameter you must enter the value "0" (zero) in the input box.
Note
4.6 Measuring run adjustment
4.6.1 General
The manual adjustment serves for mechanical alignment of the probe
to the workpiece and is very useful for setting up a measuring program.
If the alignment is poor the maximum possible stroke of the probe
could be exceeded during measurement (probe leaves the measuring
range).
4.6.1.1 Start adjustment measuring run
1. Position the feeder on the measuring column until the tracing system is
located just above the workpiece surface.
Work steps
2. Start the autozero function (F8).
➜ The measuring column automatically moves slowly until the probe signal is zero and the stylus is therefore exactly in the middle of the maximum
possible probe stroke.
3. Start an adjustment run with the function key F5 (Start).
➜ The measuring run is performed according to the measuring conditions
set in the measuring program.
If the set measuring run is exceeded during the measurement with the
stroke monitoring activated, the measurement is aborted automatically!
(see also subsection Settings tab, page 3-49)
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Attention!
4-23
The progress of the measuring operation itself is displayed dynamically. When the measurement is ended, it can be assessed on the basis of the displayed profile whether the reference level of the probe
and the workpiece surface are adequately parallel to each other.
You can also assess the selected measuring range and adjust it as
necessary.
TIP
Adapt traverse
length
If you do not know the length of the contour you want to trace, first enter
a sufficiently high estimated value in the measuring conditions.
Note
The adjustment run is a regulation measuring run - that is, provided the
measurement is error-free the profile is available for subsequent evaluations and can be saved.
Start the adjustment measuring run and observe the probe. If the desired
contour has been traversed completely, end the measuring run with F11.
The originally selected traverse length Lt is reduced to the length actually scanned. The Profile window gets a new scaling and the profile is
dragged over the whole width of the window.
4.6.1.2 Reverse linear traverse unit
If the linear traverse unit does not reverse automatically (settable in
the program sequence , see also subsection Settings tab, page 349), this must be reversed manually after the measuring run so that
the probe and the stylus return to their home positions.
The probe may have to be lifted before reversing to avoid damage!
Therefore check whether the whole travel path of the axis up to the set
return position is clear!
Proceed as follows after checking that the travel path is free:
1. Press the function key F6.
➜ The linear traverse unit moves automatically back to the set return position.
or
2. Press the appropriate arrow or cursor keys until the traverse unit is back in
its home position (return position)
The adjustment or measuring mode may not be exited with F12 as long
as the linear traverse unit is reversing! The traverse unit otherwise stays
where it is.
On initiation of a new measurement the probe would then start measuring from that position, possibly resulting in incorrect measuring results
and damage to the probe.
4-24
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
4.6.2 Align profile
An existing oblique angle of the linear traverse unit relative to the
workpiece surface (resulting in a profile oblique) can be corrected with
the aid of the alignment functions.
4.6.2.1 Align mathematically
Click on function key F2 to align the recorded profile mathematically
over its entire length.
Check whether the profile can be represented satisfactorily.
If not, you have to align it mechanically with the "Rough align" function
or align the profile partially later.
4.6.2.2 Rough alignment with mechanical tilt unit
If the profile is at a severe oblique, you can use the "Rough align"
function to align the linear traverse unit (and thus its reference plane)
mechanically by means of the measuring column tilt unit.
The following dialog box is opened with function key F3:
Figure 4-15: Traverse length rough align
Enter the traverse length for which the value is to be determined for
the rough alignment.
A measuring run over this traverse length is started by pressing the
[Start] button. Then a value is output for rough alignment:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-25
Figure 4-16: Setting value for rough alignment
The micrometer screw on the measuring column tilt unit must be adjusted by this value, observing the correct preceding sign. You can
monitor this setting operation in parallel on the dial gauge (where connected).
Be sure to lift the probe from the workpiece surface before making the
setting on the tilt unit.
4.6.2.3 Rough align with wavetilt
The motorised wavetilt unit allows comfortable motorised rough alignment.
The appropriate control and display panel is visible when the wavetilt
component is connected:
After pressing the F3 key, the "Automatic rough align" (with wavetilt)
dialog box opens:
4-26
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Save the alignment angle in the wavetilt:
After the measuring run for rough alignment the alignment angle is
moved to directly as a new reference position of the wavetilt component after automatic lifting of the probe and saved. This setting is positioned automatically after a wavetilt reference run.
Reference position wavetilt:
On pressing "Shift+F4", the wavetilt tilt unit is positioned to this saved
reference angle.
It is often useful to align the workpiece support (e.g. cross table) with
this function.
TIP
Note the special axis path when swivelling the tilt unit! Before the
wavetilt reference run, check very precisely whether the whole swivel
range is collision-free.
Reference point: approx. 50° angle range
4.6.3 Remove profile offset
If the measurement position was not optimally positioned, the recorded
profile can be moved in the direction of a measuring range limit of the
probe.
This offset is removed with the "Remove profile offset" function
(Shift+F7).
Figure 4-17: Graphic of the measured profile with zero offset
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-27
Figure 4-18: Graphic of the same profile with offset removed
4.7 Measuring run
4.7.1 Start measuring run
A measuring run can be started from the following positions:
1. Screen form
2. Adjustment menu
Click on function key F5 to start the automatic measuring run according to the measuring conditions defined in the measuring program and
the defined program sequence. If the measuring run is launched from
the screen form or the evaluation window, the adjustment window
automatically opens up.
Figure 4-19: Dynamic display measuring run
The measuring run can be traced optically by the dynamic recording
and display of the measured profile (see profile graphic above).
4-28
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Measuring run
4.7.2 Exit measurement
When starting the measurement on the screen form:
When the measurement is completed, TURBO WAVE returns to the
screen form and the recorded profile is evaluated.
When starting the measurement from the adjustment menu:
You have to go from the adjustment window to the screen form manually with F12. Depending on the design of the form, the traced measured values and evaluations are represented numerically (parameter
table) and graphically (profile diagram).
4.7.3 Save profile
4.7.3.1 Save automatically
The recorded profile is automatically saved after the measuring run
provided the autosave option has been activated in the program sequence.
If you also activated "Text input before saving" in the program sequence settings in relation to autosaving after the measuring run, another input box appears:
Text input before
autosave
Figure 4-20: Text input before saving
Enter any text or a sequence of digits. This profile text appears in the
data record of the saved parameters.
4.7.3.2 Save manually
If the profile is to be saved under an individual name or not automatically, deactivate the Autosave function in the program sequence.
You then need to save the profile as follows:
Press the function key F4 (screen form).
Depending on the user level, either the entire hard disk or only a preset folder is available as the possible file destination.
4.7.4 Abort measuring run (emergency stop)
A measuring run always runs completely over the preset sampling
length.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-29
With function key F11 the measurement can be ended prematurely for
example when there is a danger of collision. Alternatively use the
Space key of the PC keyboard.
The originally selected traverse length Lt is reduced to the length
which is actually scanned. The profile diagram gets a new scaling and
the profile is dragged over the whole width of the diagram. The contour is available to the adjustment and evaluation functions as normal.
4.7.5 Adapt measuring conditions
This function allows you to change settings for measuring conditions
and tracing system. Depending on the user level these settings can be
saved (Create measuring program mode, F7) or are only temporary
(Measure F5, Measure + Evaluate F6).
Click on function key F7 to open the "Measuring conditions" dialog
box. Enter the desired changes and confirm with [OK].
All subsequent measurements are performed under the changed conditions.
Note
"Create measuring program" mode:
To change the saved settings with the measuring program, select the
command "Save" in the "File" menu or confirm the appropriate security
prompt with [OK] when exiting the screen form!
4.8 Profile export
4.8.1 Export QS-STAT
The settings for the QS-STAT export may already have been made in
the "Create measuring program" mode in the "Settings" menu.
4.8.1.1 Start export
The export function is started with the Export QS-STAT command in
the Profile menu. Before the function is executed a dialog box with a
list of currently saved parameters and the number of failed export attempts is displayed. (see also here subsection Start export, page 348).
4-30
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile export
Figure 4-21: Start Export QS-STAT
The measuring program keeps a list of measurements which have not
yet been exported. The last sequence of not yet exported measurements is automatically selected as a default. Individual measurements
can be selected and deselected for export by highlighting
(Ctrl+mouseclick or Shift+mouseclick).
Measurements which are not highlighted are not exported!
4.8.1.2 Changing QS-STAT settings temporarily
If you want to temporarily change the settings for the Export QS-STAT
defined at creation of the measuring program, press the [Change settings] button in the Export dialog box. The QS-STAT settings dialog
box (as in the "Create measuring program" mode, see subsection QSSTAT settings, page 3-47) opens. Enter the changes and confirm
with [OK] to return to the export dialog box.
The export is started with [OK].
First the exports which failed at the last export attempt are retried. The
current parameter file is then exported.
If the export operation was successful, this will be indicated by a file
with the *.OK extension. If the export cannot be made, the parameter
file is saved and exported in the next export process.
Master data (parameter and profile files) are deleted when the "Delete
parameter file" function is activated in the settings for QS-STAT!
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-31
4.8.2 Export / Import ASCII profile
The function is only available in the user levels "Measure + Evaluate"
and "Create measuring program"!
With this command from the "Profile" menu, the profile points of the
measurement are saved in an ASCII file (*.asc). Two columns are
formed in [µm] for the position of the linear traverse unit and the probe
value. The number of lines depends on the measuring resolution and
the traverse length.
This file can then be opened with an Editor (e.g. Wordpad or Excel).
An ASCII profile file exported by TURBO WAVE can be read back in
and edited with the Import command. Every other ASCII file with profile data can be imported if it has exactly the same structure as the
TURBO WAVE ASCII file.
4.8.3 Export / Import Smd profile
SMD is a standard data exchange format for profiles according to DIN
ISO 5438, part2.
With this external profiles can be read with TURBO WAVE or TURBO
WAVE profiles can be exported for other applications in this Smd format.
4.9 Re-compute profile
4.9.1 General
This function allows the re-computation of a loaded profile under edited settings of the measuring conditions.
Thus, it is possible to display modified measuring conditions and their
effect on the respective profile, and to save them if needed.
4.9.2 Re-compute
Select the Re-compute file command from the Profile menu.
4-32
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Delete measurements
Figure 4-22: Re-compute profile
Input topic
Remarks
The dialog window for adapting the measuring conditions
is opened. Make the desired changes and confirm with
[OK].
Source file
Select the result file, from which one or more profiles are
to be re-computed
Target file
Select a result file in which the recomputed profile is to
be saved
Autosave
Select the save options for the re-computed profile by
activating the appropriate checkbox.
Parameters and/or profile can be saved in the target file.
Re-compute
Starts re-computation of the loaded profile under the
changed measuring conditions (including saving in Autosave).
4.10Delete measurements
Click on function key F8 to delete the last measurement (n-1).
Alternatively you can select the Delete last measurement item in the
Profile menu and continue as described above.
The recorded profile is deleted from the statistics (and when autosaved also from the hard disk) and the graphical and numerical representation is removed from the relevant forms.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-33
4.11Print measurement results
4.11.1 Printout form
When you actuate the F9 function key, the contents of the current
printout form will be printed regardless of whether the program is in
the screen form view or printout form view.
Alternatively the printout form can be printed under the Measuring
program menu, item Print printout form.
4.11.2 Screen form
The current screen form can only be printed under the Measuring
program menu, item Print screen form.
4.11.3 Multiprint
Detailed explanations on this topic can be found in subsection
Multiprint, page 3-64!
If the "Multiprint" function was activated in the printout form when creating the measuring program, several measurements can be represented in one printout form.
The assignment of the Multiprint repeat areas takes place automatically or manually after every measurement depending on the definition
in the measuring program. But already saved profiles can also be
loaded and stored in the Multiprint printing area.
The following dialog box is opened to select the Multiprint printing
position:
Figure 4-23: Multiprint print position
4-34
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Close measuring program
The status of the print positions is shown. Select the desired item and
confirm by pressing "OK". The filled repetition sections are represented one below the other in the printout form.
4.12 Close measuring program
Click on function key F12 to close a measuring program (screen and
printout forms). TURBO WAVE returns automatically to the main
menu.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
4-35
Profile analysis
5 Roughness profile evaluation
5.1 Profile analysis
5.1.1 Introduction
The profile analysis function provides the user with a feature for the
performance of detailed, two-dimensional evaluation of arbitrary profile
segments of the unfiltered or filtered profile in the Measure+Evaluate
mode (F6 main menu). You can analyse the current profile you have
just measured or a saved profile.
5.1.1.1 Profile types
The unfiltered primary profile of the measurement is represented in the
P profile.
Primary profile
(P profile)
Depending on the set cut-off λC, the roughness profile and the waviness profile are filtered out of the P profile.
The analogue RC-filter (DIN 4768 of 1974) as well as the digital
phase-corrected M1 filter (ISO 11562) can be applied to the P profile.
Figure 5-1: P profile
Roughness
profile
(R profile)
Figure 5-2: R profile
Waviness profile
(W profile)
Figure 5-3: W profile
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-1
Roughness profile evaluation
5.1.1.2 Loading the profile
To load a profile saved on the hard disk into the screen form, press
the F3 function key.
In the open "Profile" dialog window you can select a saved profile of
the selected parameter file (*.hwh or *.par) and you can open it by
pressing [OK].
Figure 5-4: Profile
To evaluate profiles of another parameter file, click the [Change] button and select another result file (*.hwh or *.par) in the File dialog.
Then the profile files belonging to the selected parameter file are listed
in the "Profile" dialog window.
Note
When loading a profile, the physical measuring conditions in the measuring program are adapted to this profile (switching from Lt, Vt, Device
setup, Range, Probe, Measured values). The evaluation conditions are
retained however (Filter, Lc, Lc/Ls, Align etc..).
You should therefore make sure that the open measuring program fits
the profile file!
5.1.1.3 Opening the profileanalysis window
Press the F10 function key in the screen form to open the profile analysis window.
The functions necessary for profile analysis can be called with the
function key bar and an extra toolbar.
Fig. 5-5: Functions in the profile analysis window
5-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile analysis
Function key bar:
F1
Call online help
F7
Switch the horizontal rulers on
and off
F2
Profile is aligned mathematically.
F8
Zoom function
F3
Profile is aligned to selected ranges (=partial).
F9
Vertical magnification of profile
display (in steps: 50-20-10-5-21-0.5-0.2-0.1 )
F4
Profile range between the
vertical rulers is extracted.
F10
Vertical reduction of the profile
display in steps (same as F9)
F5
Show/hide reticle
F11
Print profile graphic
F6
Switch the vertical rulers
on and off
F12
Close the profile evaluation and
return to the screen form
Toolbar:
Button
Function
Select the different profile types to be represented in the
diagram (alternatively selectable with the "View" menu)
All 4 profile types can be displayed together in the diagram.
Different profile colours improve the display.
Set the profile colours with the "Profile colours" item in the
"View" menu.
The profile filter can be selected with these buttons. M1 is
set as the default.
Filter description:
RC (analogue filter) = the resulting profile is cut by 1/6 of the
traverse length (Lt) at the beginning. This is the start-up
length Lv which the filter needs for transient oscillation.
M1 (phase-correct filter) = besides the start-up length Lv
there is also an overtravel Ln by which the resulting profile
is cut. It serves for the final oscillation of the filter. Lv and Ln
are each 1/12 of the traverse length Lt.
Start the Fourier analysis
The software changes to the material analysis (representation of the Abbott curve).
The depression surface between the intersection points of
the vertical ruler is marked and computed.
The material surface between the intersection points of the
vertical ruler is marked and computed.
Extract unwanted profile segments over the cut-off edges
(cut-off lines level).
5.1.1.4 Menu overview
Command
Description
Profile offset
Specify an offset value for the vertical relocation of
the profile graphics (P and W profile only) (see also
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Profile menu
5-3
Command
Description
subsection Setting the profile offset , page 5-7)
Align profile
(F2)
The P profile is aligned over the total length (mathematically according to the sum of the least square errors). This also relocates the W profile. (see also
subsection Aligning the total profile, page 5-7)
Partial align (F3)
The profile is partially aligned according to the individual ranges (any number possible). (see also subsection Partial align, page 5-8)
Extract over the
cut-off edges
Extract unwanted vertical profile ranges over fixed cutoff lines (profile heights) for the evaluation. (see also
subsection Extracting profile segments, page 5-8)
Extract partially
(F4)
A profile range (e.g. disturbing profile contours) selected with the vertical rulers is partially extracted.
Delete extractions
The previously extracted profile ranges are reinserted
in the graphic (undo extraction). This can only be
done in the menu!
Note:
On exiting the profile analysis you will be prompted
whether you want to permanently delete the extracted
ranges from the profile. The profile will be reassembled when you confirm deletion!
This procedure can only be undone by reloading the
original profile.
Filter menu
Evaluate air area
The depression surface between the intersection
points of the vertical ruler (show first!) is marked and
the area content computed.
Evaluate material
area
The material area between the intersection points of
the vertical ruler (show first!) is marked and the area
content computed.
Delete area
evaluations
All material and surface evaluations (mark and
compute) are deleted from the diagram.
Print
The Windows 'Print' dialog is opened and the profile
and the evaluations can be printed on any printer.
Close (F12)
The profile analysis window is closed and the software returns to the screen form.
Command
Description
RC (DIN 4768 from 1974)
Select the filter to be applied for the P profile.
M1 (ISO 11562)
JIS B 601
Edit menu
5-4
Command
Description
Set marker:
Create a text box for free placing of labels in the diagram. (see heresection Text boxes, page 5-6)
Clear selection
All text boxes created in the diagram are deleted at once.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile analysis
Command
Description
Material ratio
The software changes to the material analysis (representation of the Abbott curve).
Fourier analysis
The software starts the Fourier analysis function. A
new evaluation window is opened.
Profiles P, W, R, K,
WD1, WD2
The various profiles can be selected for viewing in
the diagram.
Profile colours
Open a dialog box for every profile to set the colour
for representation in the diagram.
Status bar
Show/hide status bar
Font
Open the Windows dialog for selecting the font for
the texts.
View menu
Rulers menu
Command
Description
Vertical ruler (F6)
Show/hide vertical and horizontal rulers. The display is on when the button is pressed.
Horizontal ruler (F7)
Reticle (F5)
Show a reticle for two-dimensional measurement
of a profile point.
Command
Description
Pane (F8)
Switch zoom function on/off for magnified
representation of a profile range
Zoom menu
Select the pane by pressing the left mouse button
and dragging open a range.
=> Then switch this function back off by clicking
on F8!!
Profile larger (F9)
Profile smaller (F10)
Maximise/minimise the profile vertically in steps.
(oversize)
5.1.2 General functions
5.1.2.1 Rulers
Vertical and horizontal rulers:
The vertical and horizontal rulers (F6 and F7) enable you to measure
the co-ordinates of the profile deviations and their distances between
each other.
and
To allow a further differentiated analysis, the profile ranges limited by
the vertical lines can be extracted or deleted for example. The profile
is then re-assembled.
Reticle:
The vertical (F6) and horizontal (F7) rulers are activated with F5.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-5
Two reticles are displayed in the profile analysis window as intersection points of the rulers. These reticles can only be moved with the
ruler handlers of the vertical rulers. The horizontal rulers move automatically because the movement of the intersection points is linked to
the profile movement and the reticles are always on the profile line.
Figure 5-6: Profile analysis window
1
Co-ordinates specification
2
Difference between the two ruler values
3
Ruler handler
4
Reticle
5.1.2.2 Text boxes
You can create text boxes and locate them at any position in the
analysis window using the Set marker command in the "Edit" menu.
Just click the right mouse button in the profile analysis window to show
the text input dialog box:
Figure 5-7: Text input dialog box
5-6
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile analysis
Change/delete individual text boxes:
Double click a text box to re-open the input dialog box for deletion or
editing of the text. Deleting the text in the dialog box also deletes the
text box. Individual text boxes can be deleted in this way.
Delete all text boxes:
The "Clear selection" command in the "Edit" menu removes all text
boxes from the analysis window!
5.1.2.3 Zoomfunction
The Zoom function is switched on and off with F8. When Zoom is
switched on, a range can be dragged open with the left mouse button
and is then displayed magnified over the full display area. The display
of the width has priority over the height of this range.
5.1.2.4 Setting the profile offset
The profile offset function is used to relocate the mean position of the
profile (P and W profile only) in the graphics by a desired value(+/-)
relative to the zero line.
Select the command in the Profile menu.
The following input dialog box is opened:
Figure 5-8: Set profile offset
The currently set offset is displayed in the top right hand corner of the
profile analysis window.
5.1.3 Aligning the profile
5.1.3.1 Aligning the total profile
Start mathematical alignment of the profile to be evaluated with function key F2.
The profile is then aligned over the whole length.
Principle of mathematical alignment:
¾ Align at the calculated mean line over the whole profile length according to
the principle of the least square errors
Then check that the profile can be adequately visually represented
with this function.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-7
If it cannot, you must carry out a mechanical alignment to the waveline
traverse unit in the adjustment window. Use the "Rough alignment"
function.
Note
If partial profile ranges have been selected for partial alignment with
F3 beforehand, the mean line is only computed over these partial
ranges and then aligned.
5.1.3.2 Partial align
With this function, one or more partial ranges can be selected to align
the profile afterwards (=>F2).
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the F3 function key => The vertical rulers are shown.
2. Select the first profile range for partial alignment by relocating the rulers.
3. Press then the F3 function key again to specify the selected range for
probe. Range limits and number are highlighted in colour.
4. If several profile ranges are to be used for partial alignment, repeat operating steps 1 to 3.
5. The actual alignment procedure is performed by then pressing F2. The
profile is now aligned according to the specified partial ranges.
5.1.4 Extracting profile segments
5.1.4.1 Automatic extraction over cut-off edges
Automatic extraction of unwanted profile segments is determined by
the profile value. The extraction cut-off level can be specified as a
mean value of all profile points, or it can be specified manually.
Select the button opposite to define the extraction criteria (see also
Fig. 5-5) or the command Extract over cut-off edges in the Profile
menu.
The following dialog box is shown:
5-8
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile analysis
Figure 5-9: Extract over cut-off edges
Input topic
Explanation
Cut-off lines
Level
The cut-off line level can be formed as follows:
•
Mean value of all profile points + offset
or
•
zero line of the graphic + offset
Offset:
The selected cut-off line is relocated relatively by
the value of an entered offset.
Evaluation range
Select the evaluation range above or below the selected cut-off line
above cut-off line
=> All points below the cut-off level are extracted.
below cut-off line
=> All points above the cut-off level are extracted.
Extract safety margin
Input of a safety margin in [µm] which is extracted
additionally before and after the extract profile.
The selected extraction range is represented as a blue-grey line in the
profile and the safety margin is represented as a red line.
The extracted profile ranges are re-displayed with the command Delete extractions (Profile menu).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-9
5.1.4.2 Extract partially
Interfering profile contours can be extracted manually with this function. Select a profile range with the vertical rulers.
The currently selected profile cut-out (profile line) is extracted between
the rulers with F4 or the command Extract partially (Profile menu).
The function can be used several times on one profile graphic.
The extracted profile ranges are re-displayed with the command Delete extractions (Profile menu).
5.1.5 Calculations on the profile
5.1.5.1 Computing areas
Use this function to compute both the air volume in the profile valleys
and the material volume in the profile peaks.
Select the profile range for which the area is to be computed with the
vertical rulers. The software then lays a straight line through the intersection points rulers/profile line. The areas above and below this
straight line are computed and represented graphically and numerically.
Depression surface:
The depression surface (air volume in the profile valleys) between the
vertical rulers is computed and displayed by clicking the button opposite.
Material area:
The material area (material volume in the profile peaks) between the
vertical rulers is computed and displayed by clicking the button opposite.
After computing the area the mouse pointer is in the window for displaying the dimension. Drag the window to the desired position and fix
it by clicking the left mouse button. The area display indicates the area
contents of the marked area in [µm2].
5-10
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile analysis
Fig. 5-10: Area computing, example depression surface (two valleys)
Delete individual area evaluations:
Double clicking the dimension opens the text input dialog box. Deleting
the text line in the dialog also deletes the individual surface evaluation.
Delete all surface evaluations:
Select the Delete area evaluations command in the "Profile" menu
to delete all area evaluations in the profile graphics.
5.1.5.2 Material evaluation
You can analyse the structure of the profile surface with the material
ratio curve (Abbott curve). The material ratio curve can be evaluated
with differentiation in the profile analysis.
By clicking the button opposite (or menu View => Material ratio) the
software changes from the profile analysis to the material ratio evaluation of the profile.
By moving the rulers (show with F6 and F7), the material ratios (in percent) can be read depending on the cut depth.
The vertical ruler specifies the material ratio in [%]. The horizontal ruler
identifies the cut depth in [µm].
1. Relocate the horizontal ruler to a specific cut depth.
Work steps:
2. Then relocate the vertical ruler to the intersection point between the material ratio curve and the horizontal ruler.
3. The vertical ruler then shows the material ratio at exactly this cut depth.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-11
Reticle
When you use the reticle function, the intersection points of both lines
always move exactly along the material ratio curve. The reticle can be
moved with both rulers.
Figure 5-11: Example for the material evaluation (Abbott curve)
1
Zero line material ratio
2
Reticle
3
Cut depth in [µm]
4
Material ratio in [%]
Display zero line:
If a zero line for the computation of the material ratio parameters has
been specified in the "Parameters" dialog box in the measuring program, this zero line can be shown or hidden in the material ratio curve
by the Edit Zero line command (Profile) for viewing (see pos. 1 in
Figure 5-11).
5.1.6 Exit profile analysis
5.1.6.1 Print
You can print the currently displayed graphic (profile, material ratio
curve or Fourier synthesis with the function key F11).
Only the simple graphic without report elements (company header
etc.) is printed!
5.1.6.2 Exit profile analysis
You exit the profile analysis window and return to the screen form with
function key F12.
5-12
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Fourier analysis
5.2 Fourier analysis
5.2.1 Introduction
The Fourier analysis function enables representation of the profiles
by their frequency portions, also known as harmonics. This representation, the so-called "amplitude spectrum" often gives valuable insights into the machining process. For this purpose, the spectrum can
be viewed in different ways and it can also be modified for "case studies". In case of such a modification, the appropriate profile can be
automatically computed back and represented. This procedure is hereinafter referred to as Fourier synthesis.
The following scope of functions is made available:
•
Calculation and representation of the Fourier spectrum
•
The view is switchable between "profile and spectrum" or "spectrum
only"
•
Linear or logarithmic (in 3 decades) representation of the spectrum.
•
Dimensions can be switched between metric and inches
•
Vertical scaling of the spectrum from 0.01 µm to 1000 µm (or 0.5 µin
to 50000 µin) selectable in standard steps
•
It is possible to determine the number and value of each harmonic by
means of two rulers.
•
The represented amplitude-spectrum range is freely selectable.
•
Any parts of the spectrum can be suppressed or completely extracted.
For this purpose, the appropriate profile is automatically recomputed.
•
Graphic printout
Function
overview
5.2.1.1 Presets in the program
In the "Fourier" tab (screen form: menu Settings => Program sequence) presets for the Fourier synthesis are defined which are then
applied automatically to the P profile.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-13
Figure 5-12: Settings for Fourier synthesis
Dialog box topic
Description
Fourier synthesis ON
Activate this function when the Fourier synthesis is
to be performed immediately after the measurement
or after loading a profile. The P profile is then represented synthesised in the screen form.
Exclusive areas
Enter the start and end numbers of the harmonics
which are to be excluded in this automatic synthesis
of the profile.
Tapered function
Activate this function when Tapered function is to
be used with the Fourier synthesis. Enter a safety
margin. (see subsection Tapered function , page 519 )
5.2.1.2 Start Fourier analysis
The Fourier analysis is started in the profile analysis window (see Fig.
5-5, page 5-2) with the button opposite or with the Fourier analysis
command (View menu). A profile must have been loaded in the profile analysis window beforehand!
The amplitude spectrum is computed from the original profile and both
of them are represented on the screen:
5-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Fourier analysis
Figure 5-13: Fourier analysis - amplitude spectrum
If allowed by the number of points of the profile, the first 500 harmonics
will always be represented with linear scaling, as a default.
Note
5.2.1.3 Switching views
With the Spectrum only command in the View menu you can switch
between the"Spectrum with P profile" and "Spectrum only" views. The
spectrum covers the whole display area in the “Spectrum only” view:
Figure 5-14: "Spectrum only" view
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-15
5.2.1.4 Using rulers
Two vertical rulers are shown at the first and last quarter of the spectrum respectively with the function key F6 or the “Rulers” menu. The
functions Extract (F2 and F3) and Suppress (F4) only become available with this function because rulers are absolutely essential to select
ranges.
Every ruler shows the value of the represented harmonics in the upper
half of the "handler" and their number/wavelength in the lower half
(wavelength = traverse length/number):
Figure 5-15: Set rulers
You can move rulers over the currently displayed part of the spectrum
with the mouse (click on the ruler handler) or with the keyboard.
When using the keyboard, it will be possible to look at each amplitude
separately and individually, even if a large number of amplitudes is
represented. To do so, proceed as follows :
1. Mover the mouse pointer until it is above one of the "handlers" of the
rulers.
2. Press the Enter key in this position. The respective ruler is selected
permanently like this.
3. Now move the ruler with the arrow keys on the keyboard (cursor keys)
to the right and left from one amplitude to the next and read the individual values.
4. This mode can be exited by pressing the Enter key again.
5-16
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Fourier analysis
5.2.2 Run Fourier analysis
5.2.2.1 Extracting frequency ranges
Extract selected range:
The frequency range between the rulers including the harmonics on
the rulers is extracted from the spectrum with F2 or the Extract selected command.
Then the P profile is shown updated (=Fourier synthesis). Extracted
harmonics are drawn in red. These extracted frequencies represented
in red are no longer a part of the newly computed P profile!
Figure5-16: Extract selected frequency range
Extract not selected range:
The frequency ranges outside the rulers are extracted with the command "Extraction not selected" in the "Edit" menu and the profile
and spectrum represented as described above.
Delete extractions:
With the Delete extractions command from the "Edit" menu the active extractions are cancelled and the profile and the spectrum shown
again without extractions(= original profile).
5.2.2.2 Suppress frequency ranges
The function is started with F4 or the Suppress command in the Edit
menu. The frequency range limited by the rulers including the
harmonics on the rulers is suppressed by 20% every time it is called
and the profile is then updated. The suppressed components of the
harmonics are represented in red:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-17
Figure 5-17: Suppress frequency range
Notes
The selected range will be extracted completely after five suppressions
(=100%). The next function call cancels the suppression completely.
If there are already suppressed or extracted harmonics in the selected
range, the harmonic below the left-hand ruler will determine the suppression of the complete range.
5.2.2.3 Scale spectrum
Scale logarithmically:
The spectrum can be represented logarithmically over 3 decades with
this function (F5).
Figure 5-18: Logarithmic scaling of the spectrum
5-18
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Fourier analysis
The portion of suppressed harmonics is also presented logarithmically
scaled.
Note
Increase range (F7):
The range between the rulers is increased with F7. The section to be
increased can also be selected by "dragging" a zoom square with the
mouse (without rulers).
The harmonics of the left and right ruler (or cut-out limits) then form
the lower or upper limit of the represented frequency range.
The range previously set (including the position of the rulers) is automatically buffered. 12 zoom steps can be stored in the buffer.
Note
Decrease range (F8):
F8 undoes the most recent zoom step. The lower or upper limit of the
represented frequency range and the position of the rulers are reset to
the values last saved.
If more that 500 harmonics can be computed on calling of the Fourier
analysis, a zoom step will automatically be available with the maximum
possible number of harmonics. This lowest zoom step cannot be overwritten.
Note
Increase amplitude (F9):
The next scaling step down in the standard series for the spectrum is
selected with F9, i.e. this is increased by the corresponding factor.
Harmonics exceeding the maximum representable value are cut down
in height.
The minimum possible scaling is 0.01 µm (or 0.5 µin).
Note
Decrease amplitude (F10):
The next scaling step up in the standard series for the spectrum is selected with F10, i.e. this is decreased by the corresponding factor.
The maximum possible scaling is 1,000 µm (or 50,000 µin).
Note
5.2.3 Tapered function
The beginning and end of the profile lines are linked in a circle for the
Fourier analysis. If the beginning and end heights are not equal, a step
occurs (jump, see the graphicFigure 5-19). This then leads to too
many high frequency harmonics with relatively great amplitudes.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-19
To bypass this effect, the safety margins at the beginning and end of
the profile can be deformed using a cosine function (Tapered function)
so that there are no sharp edges. The high-frequency harmonics
which occurred previously due to connection of beginning and end are
avoided with Tapered.
Example:
Figure 5-19: Fourier analysis without Tapered function
In the example the difference in height between profile beginning and
end is approx. 60 µm.
Figure 5-20: Fourier analysis with Tapered function
The Tapered function now leads the two profile ends to the zero line
so that there is no longer any difference. The deformation only takes
place within a safety margin to be specified. This margin is applied
once each to the beginning and end of the profile.
5-20
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Fourier analysis
5.2.3.1 Applying the tapered function
The dialog box for entering the length of the safety margin is opened
first with the Tapered command in the "Edit" menu:
Start Tapered
Figure 5-21: Set safety margin for tapered function
The tapered function is applied to the profile immediately when you
close the dialog with [OK].
Select the Remove tapered command in the Edit menu. The function
is reset and the profile represented without deformation.
Remove tapered
5.2.4 Exit Fourier analysis
5.2.4.1 Print
The current graphic (including rulers) is printed with F11.
5.2.4.2 Exit Fourier analysis
You close the Fourier analysis with one of these two buttons or with
the menu command View => Profile and return to the profile analysis
in the screen form. You can adopt the changes from the Fourier window (safety prompt for saving).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
5-21
Contour profile evaluation
6 Contour profile evaluation
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 Scope of performance
The TURBO CONTOUR software package in TURBO WAVE serves
for contour evaluation of micro and macro contours.
Scope of performance of the contour evaluation:
Category
Details
Profile functions
Offset and align profile,
Import/export DXF file,
Mirror, rotate and shorten profile;
Point functions
Free point, profile point, point of intersection, profile
point at maximum, profile point at minimum
Element functions
any two-point line, horizontal/vertical two-point line,
regression lines, radius centre point arc, circle fit
from segments, circle fit from radius, sphere in
Gothic arcs, profile comparison, angle halving, convexity
Result functions
any distance, distance horizontal/vertical, radius,
radius from profile or circle segments, radius from
profile or circle arc, inside and outside angle,
(Characteristics)
Operating functions
of the software
Auto-evaluation
Toolbars can be variably activated (elements, layers, function keys, status bar, control bar, evaluation bar)
Show/hide element list
Profile graphic in variable zoom representation possible
Archiving/ reports
Load and save profile/result file; printout form,
screen form, profile graphic from evaluation window, drawing form;
6.1.2 Evaluation window
The Evaluate CONTOUR function offers the user the possibility of
carrying out detailed, two-dimensional evaluations of any profile segments of the measured contour. You can analyse either the profile you
have just measured or a saved profile.
The basis for contour evaluation is the profile displayed in the program
workspace. Aids are provided to calculate contour dimensions such as
radii and angles. They can be set randomly (free points, profile points)
or as the result of a calculation (point of intersection of two straight
lines). These aids are termed elements, and the dimensions characteristics.
6-22
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
Figure 6-1: Complete evaluation window
The workspace of the evaluation window can be split into two sections:
Profile window and element list.
The element list provides a concise view of all completed evaluation
actions and can be optionally displayed or hidden.
6.1.3 Opening the evaluation window
Click on function key F11 in the screen form to open the CONTOUR
evaluation window (TURBO CONTOUR in TURBO WAVE). The function key bar now looks like this:
F1
Call the Help system
F9
Print out the contents of the evaluation window
F12
Exit the evaluation window and return to the screen form of
TURBO WAVE
You will find a description of the commands assigned to the function
keys in the following subsection.
6.1.4 Menu overview
The table below gives a brief summary of the contents of the menus in
the evaluation window. More detailed information is given in the subsequent subsections.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-23
6.1.4.1 Menu file
Command
Description
Update
xxx.rpg
Changed settings for the evaluation window Contour
(colours etc.) are saved in the higher level measuring
program *.rpg and are displayed the next time the window is opened.
Load profile
(*.prf)
An earlier CONTOUR profile is imported in *.prf format.
(downward compatibility)
Save profile as
(*.prf)
The current CONTOUR profile is exported in the old
TURBO CONTOUR format *.prf. (downward compatibility)
Import profile
from DXF-file
Imports a DXF profile to the format of TURBO
CONTOUR:
Export profile
to DXF file
Exports a profile measured in TURBO WAVE as a polyline to DXF format.
Print (F9)
Print out the current content of the evaluation window
(profile graphic) on the printer.
Page view
The print page (contents of the evaluation window) is
shown as a whole page view.
Printer setup
Change the print options or the printer.
Exit and return
to xxx.rpg
(F12)
Exit the evaluation window and return to the screen form
of TURBO WAVE. If other settings in the evaluation window are not saved first (command: Update *.rpg), the
evaluation window is opened with the standard settings
the next time it is called.
6.1.4.2 Edit menu
Command
Description
Undo
The last action is undone.
Delete
Deletes an element or characteristic previously selected in the element list.
Align profile
Align the current profile.
This function is only possible for undimensioned profiles!
=> If partial alignment ranges were defined beforehand, the profile is aligned partially based on those
ranges.
6-24
Profile without alignment
Cancels the previous profile alignment (undo
alignment)
Mirror profile
Calls the Mirror profile dialog box.
Cut profile range
Part of the profile is cut out and the remaining parts
joined.
Turn profile
Activates the function for turning the profile line.
Shorten profile
Activates the function for shortening the profile
line.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
Command
Description
Reduce profile
points
Comfort function for selecting a lower number of
measuring points (for optimisation of the computing
time in the profile comparison)
Fix profile
Switches the Fix function on/off.
=> This prevents unwanted spatial shifting of the profile.
6.1.4.3 Evaluate menu
Command
Description
Create elements
Got to a submenu with a listing of all functions for
creating elements:
=> See subsection Creating elements, page for an
explanation of the functions 6-43!
Create characteristics
Go to a submenu with a listing of all functions for
creating characteristics
=> See subsection Calculating characteristics, page
for an explanation of the functions 6-76!
Characteristics
tolerances
The dialog box for entering the tolerance limits for the
created characteristics is opened.
Set anchor
Sets a significant free point for which the evaluation
actions of the automatic evaluation run are set in relation (evaluation relative to the anchor point)
Save autoevaluation
Evaluations performed on the profile are saved for an
auto-evaluation specific to a measuring program.
Run autoevaluation
The previously saved auto-evaluation for the measuring program used is evaluated.
Delete autoevaluation
Deletes the last saved auto-evaluation run.
Delete last evaluation
The whole evaluation of the profile (all characteristics
and elements) is deleted.
6.1.4.4 Settings menu
Command
Description
Font
Sets the font for labelling of the co-ordinates system
axes (font type, colour, size, etc.).
Layers
Formats the available layers (max. 16) with name,
colour, display options etc.
Characteristic
numbers
Shows and hides the display of characteristic numbers in the profile graphic and in the element list
=> The numbers are assigned automatically and
consecutively in the order of the characteristic creation!
Characteristic values
Hide and show the display of the characteristic values
in the profile graphic
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-25
Command
Description
Selector cursor
The selector cursor for selecting element points,
characteristics etc. can be set in three sizes (large,
medium, small).
View after automatic run
A dialog box for defining the view options for the profile window is opened after the automatic evaluation
run.
Background colour
Any background colour can be selected in the evaluation window (profile graphic only).
Interpolate profile
points
Large measuring point distances on vertical edges
are filled up by interpolation. => see subsection
Interpolate profile points, page 6-37
6.1.4.5 View menu
Command
Description
Function keys
Show/hide the function key bar (F1 to F12).
Element bar
Show/hide the element bar (functions for creating elements).
Evaluation bar
A submenu is displayed for hiding and showing the
individual toolbars for the characteristics creation:
(control bar)
Angle, radius, distance, profile form deviation, alignments, fits, user functions, fine fitting;
=> For explanations, see subsection Adapting settings , page 6-29!
Attention! The Fine fitting toolbar can only be selected for displaying under this menu!
6-26
Others
Show/hide the toolbar => see subsection Layers ,
page 6-32
Status bar
Show/hide the status bar.
Zoom 1:1
Call up proportional zoom mode (X and Y axis use
the same scale to zoom the profile segment).
Zoom Z axis/X
axis
Call the Zoom mode for the Z axis/X axis
Zoom stages Z axis/X axis
A submenu is opened in which individual zoom
stages can be selected directly.
Select
Exit the zoom function and return to the function =>
see subsection Selecting elements , page 6-46
Zoom 100%
This function zooms the profile in X and Y direction
with different magnification so that the profile can be
displayed completely in the evaluation window.
Window split
Show/hide the element list additionally to the profile
window
Drawing form
A drawing header with the contents of the measuring
conditions and company header forms is shown in
the evaluation window.
Overview
Show/hide the overview window.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
6.1.5 Zoom functions
With the zoom functions you can zoom in to view selected profile
segments proportionally or in just one axis direction.
The following functions are available in each individual zoom mode:
1. Zoom window:
Hold down the left (primary) mouse button and draw a rectangle framing the profile segment you want to view. When you release the
mouse button the framed segment will be zoomed in the evaluation
window.
2. Mouseclick mode:
You can select the individual zoom levels by briefly clicking the mouse
buttons:
=> left mouse button => Zoom in
=> Shift key + left mouse button => Zoom out
Choose the Select function again to exit the Zoom mode (right mouse
button or View menu).
The position of the cursor (in this case a magnifying glass symbol) is
automatically taken as the centre of the new zoomed segment in order
to display the selected segment optimally.
Function
Explanation
Proportional zoom:
Zoom 1:1
The X and Y axis always use the same scale for displaying
the profile.
Zoom by mouseclick:
enlarges/reduces the representation of the Z axis only
Zoom Zaxis
Zoom by mouseclick:
enlarges/reduces the representation of the X axis only
Zoom Xaxis
Automatic setting of the Zoom stage so that the profile can be
displayed completely in the evaluation window whilst retaining
the previously selected Zoom mode.
Zoom
100%
Show/hide an additional window giving an overview of the
complete profile and the position of the current selected profile segment in it (white highlighted rectangular area):
Overview
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-27
Function
Explanation
You can select a new display section for the evaluation window easily by moving the white section with the left mouse
button pressed.
6.2 Functions in the evaluation window
6.2.1 General settings
6.2.1.1 Introduction
The evaluation window of TURBO CONTOUR in TURBO WAVE offers
numerous possibilities for adapting to individual requirements. This includes the variable display and positioning of the icon and toolbars,
the split function and the colour design of the evaluations.
The first time the evaluation window is opened, defaults are active
which allow you to start working immediately. You can still adapt the
layout to your specific needs, as described in the following.
4
5
3
2
1
5
Figure 6-2: Evaluation window split
6
6-28
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Functions in the evaluation window
The elements of the evaluation window have the following functions:
Pos./windo
w element
Functional description
1/Profile window
Workspace for interactive profile evaluation and display of
results.
Representation of the profile graphic including the created
elements and calculated characteristics in graphic form
2/Element list
Listing of created elements and calculated characteristics in
table form (only visible in the split representation)
=> Showing and hiding possible
3/Toolbars
Topically grouped functions on icon buttons (Zoom, Elements, Characteristics etc.)
4/Control bar
contains all functions in connection with the design and adaptation of the evaluation window and special functions
5/Scrollbars
Move the profile to display another segment (if the profile
cannot be displayed completely in the profile or evaluation
window because of the zoom representation).
6/Element
bar
The element bar provides the tools for creating elements as
the basis for calculation of characteristics, in the form of
buttons.
6.2.1.2 Adapting settings
The key functions for visual and functional adaptation of the evaluation
window are located on the so-called "control bar".
Toolbars and function key bars can also be selected with the appropriate menu commands in the View menu (subsection View menu, page
6-26).
Figure 6-3: Toolbar control bar
Characteristic toolbars
Auto-evaluation
With these icon buttons the individual characteristic functions can be
shown and hidden grouped as toolbars in the evaluation window.
This configurability of the screen view permits optimum adaptation to
the measurement task at hand.
Function
Explanation
Show the angle calculation toolbar:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-29
Function
Explanation
Show the radius calculation toolbar:
Show the dimensioning toolbar:
Show the alignment functions toolbar:
Show the profile form deviation toolbar:
Show the bestfit toolbar:
Show the special functions toolbar:
Show/hide the element list additionally to the profile window
(window split)
The toolbar for the fine fitting can only be shown under the View menu!
The other icon buttons on the control bar contain functions for the
automatic evaluation run (Auto-evaluation). Using this function, you
can apply evaluations carried out on the profile of a workpiece to other
workpieces of the same type. This provides you with a simplified
means of automation for recurring applications. (see section Autoevaluation, page 6-89)
Co-ordinates system
6-30
In order to be able to define the zero point of a profile freely, the coordinates system has been extended so that a profile line can be positioned freely over all 4 quadrants.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
6.2.1.3 Element bar (draw)
The element bar provides the tools for creating elements as the basis
for calculation of characteristics, in the form of buttons. Since these
functions are continually in use, it makes little sense to hide them. The
element bar located at the bottom of the screen in the standard setting
can only be shown and hidden with the menu command in the View
menu and be dragged to any position on the screen with the mouse.
Explanations of the individual element functions can be found in subsection Creating elements, page 6-43.
6.2.1.4 Element list
It is in the element list, as part of the evaluation window, that all generated elements and characteristics are entered.
The properties are listed in table form. You can click with the mouse
on the elements and characteristics in the element list to select and
edit them.
Element list off/on:
With this button the element list can be hidden from the evaluation
window to be able to display the profile better. Press the button
again to show the list again.
Set window size (for split window):
By "picking up" the vertical separating line between the two windows
and moving it with the left mouse button pressed, you can change the
size of the two windows.
Element list properties:
The four columns of the element list display the key properties of the
elements and characteristics.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-31
Figure 6-4: Element list
Column
Explanation
Name
Icon and name of the element or characteristic as a sorting criterion.
optional: [xx] characteristic number for characteristics (if set for
viewing)
Type
Precise designation of the element or characteristic type (point,
straight line, circle...)
Layer
Designation of the layer to which the element or characteristic
was assigned.
Reference
Display the first base element to which the generated element or
characteristic refers.
Click with the right (secondary) mouse button on an element in the list
to open the relevant Properties dialog box. In this dialog all element
properties are entered in detail and can be changed according to the
element type (e.g. name, colour attribute, co-ordinates etc.; see also
subsection Element properties, page 6-44).
If you carry out more evaluations on the profile while the element list is
hidden, the new or modified elements will still be included in the list.
Conversely, changes to the element list also affect the graphical representation in the profile window.
6.2.1.5 Layers
The TURBO CONTOUR evaluation window provides up to 16 layers to
display the evaluation. You can make separate settings for each layer,
permitting differentiated graphical representation.
By default the toolbar is positioned at the top of the profile window. It
displays the current selected layers with their names.
Figure 6-5: Layers toolbar
6-32
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
The "Layers" dialog box is opened by clicking on this button:
Scroll
layers
(up/down)
Figure 6-6: Layers dialog box
Input topic
Explanation
Name
Text box for input of a name for the preset layer.
No.
Consecutive, permanently assigned number of the layer (1 to
16)
Colour
Assignment of a colour for displaying the elements of this
layer
Settings
The font size of the dimension figures and the length of the
dimensioning arrows can be set in [mm] (standard: 4mm).
Display
Every layer can be formatted as 'hidden' on the screen (profile window only!) and formatted for the printout in the evaluation window
Arrow keys
These keys serve to select the individual levels.
If layers are formatted 'hidden' the elements contained in these layers
are still listed in the element list!
Assignment of elements to layers:
Elements can be assigned to the layers either automatically or manually. The profile itself and the Align action are automatically assigned
to layer 1 (Profile).
automatic
If you are currently in Layer 1, 2 or 3, the standard assigned
layer is selected automatically when a new element or characteristic is created.
Elements => Layer 2 (extension lines)
Characteristics => Layer 3 (dimensioning)
Manual
If you are currently in Layer 4 or higher the currently set layer
is assigned to every newly created element or characteristic
Note:
Manually selecting layer 1,2 or 3 reactivates automatic
assignment.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-33
6.3 Profile functions
6.3.1 Adapting the profile position
6.3.1.1 Aligning the profile
A skew position of the profile can be corrected using the alignment
functions. Either the entire profile or part of it can be aligned.
Function
Procedure
Click on the function
Align
=> The current profile is aligned over the total profile distance
Select the function.
Align partially
horizontal
Click on the first destination position on the profile line with
the cursor
=> The point is temporarily drawn as a segment limiter.
Click on the second destination position on the profile line
with the cursor
=> the first segment is drawn in
Align partially
vertical
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for every further segment (max. 10
ranges possible).
Click with the right mouse button in the profile window to
terminate the function
=> Profile is aligned partially (horizontal or vertical) by a regression line after the selected segments
Align from
maxima
This alignment is performed analogous with partial alignment. However, only the maximum of every selected segment is used for forming the regression line which is used
for alignment.
If the automatic alignment functions do not lead to the desired result,
manual fine fit can be performed. Further information about this can be
found in subsection Fit profile manually (fine fit, optional) , page 6-76.
6.3.1.2 Mirror profile
The Mirror profile function enables mirroring with or without copy of
the profile line.
The function Mirror profile is only possible on a non-dimensioned profile! As soon as elements or characteristics are formed, the function can
no longer be used.
The following dialog box is opened when selecting the function:
6-34
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile functions
Figure 6-7: Mirror profile dialog box
Input topic
Explanation
Horizontal /
Vertical
Select the axis to be used to mirror the profile line (X or
Z).
Distance
Reference point reflection point
In this field, an offset value in [mm] can be specified by
which the mirrored profile is displayed shifted from the
mirror point.
Copy profile and
reflect
The profile is mirrored with copy.
Both profiles (original and mirrored) are displayed in
the diagram.
Mirror point = the profile point clicked first after closing the dialog
box!
After closing the dialog box a profile point must be defined as a mirror
point by clicking a profile point. The profile is then mirrored at this
point.
Inverted measurement (e.g., internal measurement):
The profile actually sought can only be measured as its inversion because of its geometry. Profile mirroring provides the profile sought.
Application examples
Symmetrical parts (e.g., sleeve, measured on the inside):
Profile mirroring with copy can be used to display the complete contour.
6.3.1.3 Rotate profile
The function Rotate profile is used to completely rotate the profile in
the diagram. The point of rotation is always the profile origin left in the
diagram.
After selecting the function (Alignment toolbar or Edit menu), the profile can be grabbed with the left mouse button and rotated once up to
the desired position. The function must be selected again for each additional rotation!
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-35
The function Rotate profile is also possible on a dimensioned profile.
Profile-dependent dimensions could change because of the modified
profile position!
Example: Maximum values (e.g. maximum profile point) can be changed
by turning the position of the profile and thus its co-ordinates. The position modification must be observed during the rotation.
TIP
When rotating the profile, use the 1:1 scale (100% zoom) for a realistic
display. At other scales, the profile display is distorted.
The fine fitting function can be used for a more accurate rotation. You
will find further information about this in subsection Fit profile manually
(fine fit, optional), page 6-76.
6.3.1.4 Shift and fix profile
The Shift and Fix functions are used on a complete profile (dimensioned, with elements and characteristics).
Shift
The profile can be shifted in the X and Z direction.
Deactivate a fixing of the profile first if necessary (click Edit menu =>
Fix ).
Click with the left mouse button on any position of the profile line and
while holding the mouse button pressed, shift the profile including all
elements to the desired position on the diagram. Then release the
mouse button.
The fine fitting function can also be used for a more accurate shift.
You will find further information about this in subsection Fit profile
manually (fine fit, optional), page 6-76.
Fix
The Fix function sets the profile on the current position in the diagram
and thus protects it from being spatially shifted unintentionally.
The function is switched off by default.
The function Fix profile is only available in the "Edit" menu! When autodimensioning is activated, a fixed profile is not fitted into the master profile (for profile comparison)!
6.3.2 Change profile form
6.3.2.1 Cut profile range
With this function a selected range is cut (deleted) from the profile line.
Then the end points of the remaining profile segments are joined
(automatic adaptation in X and Y direction).
1. Select the function in the toolbar.
2. Click on the starting point of the range to be cut out with the left mouse
button.
3. Click on the end point of the range to be cut out with the left mouse button.
6-36
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile functions
4. Terminate the function by clicking with the right mouse button.
5. The selected range is cut out and the profile at the end points of this range
joined automatically.
This function can only be used in the undimensioned profile!
Note
6.3.2.2 Eliminating outliers
Outliers on the profile line can be eliminated with this function. The existing profile line is deleted within a selected range and the end points
are connected by a straight line.
1. Select the function on the toolbar.
2. Click with the left mouse button on the starting point of the range to be cut
out.
3. Click with the left mouse button on the end point of the range to be cut out.
4. Terminate the function by clicking with the right mouse button.
5. The selected range is cut out and the profile line is replaced by a straight
line between the two end points of the selected range.
This function can only be used for the undimensioned profile
Note
6.3.2.3 Shorten profile
Select the function Shorten profile ("Edit" menu or element bar).
Using the left mouse button, click on a point on the profile line where
you would like to cut it. The shorter part of the profile is then removed.
The function must be selected again for each additional shortening!
The function Shorten profile is only possible on a non-dimensioned profile! As soon as elements or characteristics are formed, the function can
no longer be used.
6.3.2.4 Interpolate profile points
The profile point interpolation is used especially on steep or vertical
profile edges with few profile points. Then profile points can be selected better and regression lines set better.
With this function, different distances of the profile points with regard
to the X axis are averaged and then distributed evenly over the whole
profile length in an arc. This also filters peaks.
Activate the Interpolate profile points command in the Settings menu.
The current measuring point distances and the number of measuring
points can be read in the Properties dialog box for the profile line.
The profile point interpolation is irreversible!
Note
The interpolation is always used for the currently measured profile or
the profile displayed in the evaluation window. If the auto-evaluation
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-37
with interpolation has been saved, the measured profile is also evaluated.
TIP
If the profile is to be evaluated primarily on the steep edges, you
should try to turn the workpiece (if possible) so that the edge is preferably horizontal and more original measuring points can be recorded.
6.4 Special functions
6.4.1 Import/export DXF profile
6.4.1.1 Import profile from DXF file
This function is used to import DXF profiles and for comparison with a
measured profile.
The software imports the contour of the DXF profile and converts
these data into their own format. The DXF file can only contain
elements which display the profile, but no frames.
The Special functions toolbar must be switched on to display the function buttons.
1. Click on the button or select the command Import profile from DXF file
for the File menu.
2. Select the desired file in the file dialog box. The profile is imported, converted, and displayed in the evaluation window.
3. Now carry out the desired evaluations/dimensionings.
4. Save the profile including evaluations as a master profile.
The saved master profile can be used for profile comparison.
6.4.1.2 Export profile to DXF file
Export is used to output a measured profile as a polyline to a DXF file.
Certain elements of dimensioning (points, lines, arcs) can be exported,
but without dimension figures!
1. Click on this button or select the command Export profile to DXF file in
the File menu.
2. The following dialog box opens:
6-38
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Special functions
Dialog box topic
Description
Profile as polyline
The output points defined under measuring point
density are output as polyline, i.e. the points are joined
together.
No. of measurement points
Select how many measuring points are to be output
from the list
all: 100%
th
fine: 10% (every 10 measuring point)
th
medium: 5% (every 20 measuring point)
th
coarse: 2% (every 50 measuring point)
Save graphic
elements
The dimensioning of the contour (points, lines, arcs) is
output to the DXF file but without dimension figures!
Confirm your entries with [OK].
3. Select a folder in the subsequent file dialog box and enter a name for the
DXF profile.
6.4.2 Beading evaluation
Full and half beads (e.g. on gaskets) can be evaluated quickly and
automatically with this function.
The following dimensions are determined on the beading:
Full beading
Half beading
•
Beading width
•
Beading width
•
Beading height
•
Beading height
•
Symmetrical deviation
•
Tangent height
•
Ratio tangent height to beading
height (H0/H)
The half beading must always be scanned from the surface in the direction of the half beading.
Calibrations (stylus height, stylus radius) must have been made before
starting the measurement.
6.4.2.1 Evaluation full beading
Click two profile points one after the other which mark the beginning
and end of the full beading.
The following elements are created, drawn and the beading evaluation
performed immediately and automatically:
•
Centre, minima and maximum of the curve in the beading range
•
two reversal point tangents (tangents with maximum pitch to the left and
right of the maximum)
•
base lines on right and left of the beading
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-39
The interval width n1 of the search window for these tangents is adapted
in the Beading evaluation defaults dialog box:
Note
Figure 6-8: Beading evaluation defaults
Analogously the interval width n4 for determining the base lines to the right
and left of the beading is specified.
•
Point of intersection of the two reversal point tangents
•
Interface points between the base line and the reversal point tangents (left
and right)
•
Base line (either between the two minima or the two intersection points
base line reversal point tangents)
•
Middle perpendicular to the base line
•
Perpendicular to the base line, starting from the intersection point of the
reversal point tangents
This perpendicular and the middle perpendicular for parallels.
All elements for the evaluation are therefore available. The evaluation
takes place automatically in the same work step.
6-40
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Special functions
Figure 6-9: Evaluation full beading
Pos.
Description
1
Profile line beading
2a/2b
Range limits of the beading (left and right)
3
Profile point in the maximum of the beading
4
Point of intersection of the two reversal point tangents
5
Middle perpendicular to the base line
6
Perpendicular from pos. 4 to the base line
7
Base line
8
Beading height
9
Beading width
10
11
Tangent height
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-41
The evaluations are defined as follows:
Beading height
Distance from base line to maximum
Beading width
Distance between the two points of intersection of the
reversal point tangents with the base line
Distance between the two parallel lines in pos. 5 and 6
(middle perpendicular and perpendicular)
Tangent height
Distance from base line to the point of intersection of the
reversal point tangents
Ratio H0/H
Ratio of the tangent height to the beading height (only
visible in the Characteristics tolerances dialog box in
the Evaluate menu)
6.4.2.2 Evaluation of half beading
Only the points of intersection of the reversal point tangents with the
base lines (left and right). No base line is formed.
Figure 6-10: Half beading evaluation
6-42
Pos.
Description
1
Reversal point tangent
2a/2b
Base lines (left and right)
3
Beading width
4
Beading height
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
6.5 Creating elements
6.5.1 Introduction
The basis for contour evaluation is the profile displayed in the workspace of the evaluation window. To calculate contour dimensions (e.g.
radii and angles) you must first define aids (points, regression lines,
circles). These aids are termed elements. They can be set randomly
(free points, profile points) or as the result of a calculation (point of intersection of two straight lines).
Elements are parts of the contour evaluation which are necessary for
calculating contour characteristics. The variable element design enables a versatile, uncomplicated evaluation of the contour. An element
may be used as the basis for several different characteristics, for example.
All available element types can be selected from the element bar:
Point functions generate points. Free points and profile points are basic elements of the contour evaluation from which other elements can
be created. Points of intersection and profile points at maximum and
minimum already result from calculations.
Element functions generate straight lines or circles.
The following subsections describe how elements and element functions are created and used.
6.5.2 General element functions
6.5.2.1 Setting elements
Set the elements by selecting the element function you want from the
element bar and then clicking with the left mouse button in the profile
window.
1. Select the function by clicking on the icon button.
Work steps
2. Click with the cursor on a destination position in the profile window (once
or twice depending on the element function).
3. The element is drawn at the destination position or the calculated position
and entered in the element list.
4. Click the right mouse button on the selected element to open the corresponding Properties dialog. Other element properties can be defined or
changed.
If you want to create several elements of the same type one after the
other, press the spacebar after every action to reselect the element.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
TIP
6-43
A second point can be defined either to the right or left of the first.
It is possible, but not necessary, to use existing elements to define a
new element. Select the elements to be used one after the other. A combination of freely selected and existing elements is also possible.
The limitation points of calculated elements (e.g. range for profile point
at maximum) are only plotted temporarily and are not included in the
element list.
6.5.2.2 Element properties
Click with the right mouse button on the selected element to open the
associated Properties dialog box:
Tab
Properties
Figure 6-11: Element properties
In the Properties tab the element designation and the colour attribute
are adapted.
The remaining entries (layer, element type) are entered automatically
and cannot be changed.
The colour of the appropriate layer is assigned as standard (see subsection Layers , page 6-32).
Click on the options box Own colour and then select the colour you
want in the list box of the same name.
6-44
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Tab
Co-ordinates
Figure 6-12: Element co-ordinates
The element-relevant co-ordinates can be read exactly in the Coordinates tab. For certain free elements (e.g. free point and text), the
co-ordinates can be changed freely here and the elements shifted in
the co-ordinates system.
The scope of information on this tab varies according to element type.
References tab
Figure 6-13: Element references
In the References tab information for sequencing the selected element
with other elements, characteristics etc. is displayed.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-45
6.5.2.3 Position element
The current X/Z co-ordinates of the cursor position are displayed dynamically to three decimal places on the status bar at the bottom right.
This enables you to target specific points very precisely.
However, creating elements with the mouse does not always generate
precisely the desired position for the element concerned.
Elements can therefore be positioned exactly after being created in the
profile window when they satisfy the following conditions:
•
They are not the result of a calculation (free points, straight lines...).
•
They do not represent the basis for further calculations.
Call the Properties dialog box (see subsection Element properties,
page 6-44). In the Co-ordinates tab the X/Z co-ordinates for the
points relevant to the element can be changed insofar as this box is
released for inputs (=white background).
If the conditions for later element positioning described above are not
satisfied, the co-ordinates have a grey background and cannot be
changed.
6.5.2.4 Selecting elements
The element selection function is automatically set up as a basic setting after every action executed.
Exception
After changing to the Zoom mode the Select element function must be
selected again by a mouseclick.
In the Selection mode, elements are shown in red directly above an
element when pointing with the mouse or after selecting in the element
list in the profile window. In this condition you can edit the elements.
On pressing the right hand mouse button, a Properties dialog is
opened for changing the name, co-ordinates, colour attributes and
similar.
TIP
If several elements are close together, a single element can be selected
better in the element list!
6.5.2.5 Deleting elements
There are several different ways of deleting elements:
1. Delete a selected element (coloured red) by pressing the Del key.
2. Select delete mode with this icon button
=> Position the cursor above the element
=> Press left mouse button => Element is deleted
The Delete mode is exited again by clicking on the 'Select element' button.
3. The last action can be undone with the Undo button in the Edit menu.
6-46
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
If the selected element forms the basis for the creation of further elements or characteristic calculations, a security prompt is delivered before the delete operation is executed.
If this prompt is answered with [Yes], all elements linked to this basis
are deleted!
6.5.2.6 Setting text markers
This function allows you to add any information/message texts you
want in the profile window. They will also be visible in the profile
graphic on the screen form.
Function
Description
2. Click on a destination position in the profile window
Set text marker
=> the text marker is drawn
3. Click the right mouse button on the selected text box
to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> text marker positions can be defined by entering coordinates
=> name and colour of the text marker can be defined
Figure 6-14: Text marker
6.5.3 Point functions
6.5.3.1 Set free point
You can set a free point at any position in the profile window. As opposed to a profile point, it is not referred to measured values.
Function
Description
1. Select the function by clicking on this icon button.
Set free point
2. Click the desired destination position in the profile window with the cursor.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-47
Function
Description
=> the point is drawn
3. Click the right mouse button on the selected point to
open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> The point can be positioned exactly by entering coordinates.
=> name and colour can be defined.
Figure 6-15: Free point
6.5.3.2 Setting profile points
The position of a profile point can only be freely selected in measuring
direction (X). In Z-direction it is defined by the associated ordinate value.
The cursor automatically "picks up" the profile contour line.
profile point
(standard)
Function
Description
profile point
(standard)
2. Click with the cursor on a destination position along the
profile line.
=> The profile point is drawn
3. Click with the right mouse button on the selected profile
point to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> name and colour can be determined
Profile point in Z
or X maximum
6-48
The 'Profile point at maximum' function determines the highest profile
point in a selected area. Two profile points are specified as range limits here between which the greatest value of the Z and X co-ordinates
respectively is determined (see also Figure 6-16 below).
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Function
Description
1. Select the function by clicking on one of these icon buttons.
profile point
in the Z or X
maximum
2. Click the cursor on the first X or Z destination position.
=> A point is drawn temporarily
3. Click with the cursor on the second X or Z destination
position.
=> Profile point in Z or X maximum is calculated and drawn
point in the maximum to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> name and colour can be defined
The 'Profile point at minimum' function determines the lowest profile
point in a selected area. The same information applies as given for the
”Profile point at maximum” function.
Function
Profile point in
the Z or X
minimum
Description
1. Select the function by clicking on one of these icon buttons.
Profile point
in the Z or X
minimum
2. Click on the first X or Z destination position with the cursor.
=> A point is drawn temporarily
3. Click on the second X or Z destination position with the
cursor.
=> The profile point is calculated and drawn in the Z or X
minimum
point in the minimum to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
Figure 6-16: Setting profile points
6.5.3.3 Setting point of intersection
It is possible to calculate points of intersection between the following
elements:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-49
•
Straight line - Straight line
•
Straight line - Arc
Where points of intersection are found between two selected elements, they are drawn in the profile window. The elements are entered
as a basis for the point of intersection in the 'References' tab.
Function
Description
2. Click on the first element with the cursor.
Set points of
intersection
3. Click on the second element with the cursor.
=> The point of intersection is calculated and drawn.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the selected point
of intersection to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
Figure 6-17: Set points of intersection
6.5.3.4 Set pilot point
Fitting of a profile can be simplified by defining a pilot point as a reference point for fitting.
A reliably determinable point (useful: point of intersection of two regression lines) is set to the pilot point and saved as auto-evaluation.
The pilot point is then determined on the measured profile in exactly
the same way and this pilot point fit exactly to the pilot point of the
master profile. Unlike in the anchor function, the pilot point represents
a point determined reliably by elements.
Unlike normal points of intersection the co-ordinates of a pilot point
can be changed. In this way the profile can be set to defined coordinates (e.g. X=0, Y=0) at the pilot point.
6-50
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
There is always only one pilot point. If another point is set for the pilot
point, the previous pilot point loses this property!
Function
Note
Description
The point to be selected must have been determined by appropriate functions first!
1. Switch on the Bestfit toolbar.
Set pilot
point
2. Select the pilot point function by clicking the button opposite.
3. Click with the cursor on the point (point of intersection)
to be set for the pilot point.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the pilot point to
open the Properties dialog:
=> The Pilot point property is displayed in the Reference
tab.
6.5.4 Line functions
6.5.4.1 General
Lines can be created both between two given points and as parallel
lines or as a perpendicular to an existing line.
Existing elements can also be selected as base points for creating a
line.
These are, for example:
•
Profile point, profile point at minimum/maximum
•
Arc centre point
•
Points of intersection
•
Free points
•
Existing lines (generation of parallels)
The co-ordinates of every line can only be changed if this line is not a
basis for other elements or itself has a reference to a basis! Parallel distances can be freely adapted.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Note
6-51
Figure 6-18: Set line
Note
Lines are drawn with beginning and end points but can be used as ideal
straight lines for calculations (e.g. distance from a point).
Example: Line as an ideal straight line for a calculation
Position
Description
A
Beginning of the base line
E
End of the base line
P
(free) point
L
Distance point-straight line (perpendicular)
In this example the line has been lengthened to calculate the distance.
6-52
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
6.5.4.2 Free line
The 'Set line' function generates a straight line as an element from two
specified points in the co-ordinates system. The straight line is delimited by the two selected points.
Function
Description
Set free line
2. Click with the cursor on the first destination position or
an existing element:
=> A point is set and drawn as a line point.
3. Click with the cursor on the second destination position
or selected another element:
=> The line is calculated and drawn.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the selected line to
=> name and colour can be changed
=> The co-ordinates can only be changed if no other references are available.
6.5.4.3 Horizontal line
The function 'Set horizontal line' creates a horizontal straight line as an
element from any two given points. The straight line is delimited by the
two selected points as follows:
1. The first mouseclick defines the X and Z co-ordinates of the first end
point.
2. The second mouseclick defines the X co-ordinate of the second end
point.
=> The Z co-ordinate of the first end point is automatically adopted for the
second end point (Z1 = Z2).
3. The horizontal line is drawn between these two end points.
Function
Description
Set horizontal line
select an element:
=> A point is set and drawn as a first line point.
or select another element:
=> The line is calculated and drawn as described above.
=> The co-ordinates can only be changed if no references
are available.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-53
6.5.4.4 Vertical line
The 'Set vertical line' function generates a vertical straight line as an
element from any two specified points. The straight line is delimited by
the two selected points as follows:
1. The first mouseclick defines the X and Z co-ordinates of the first end
point.
2. The first mouseclick defines the Z co-ordinate of the second end point.
=> The X co-ordinate of the first end point is automatically adopted for the
second end point (X1 = X2).
3. The vertical line is drawn between these two end points.
Function
Description
Set vertical
line
select an element:
=> A point is set and drawn as a first line point.
or select another element:
=> The line is calculated and drawn as described above.
=> The co-ordinates can only be changed if no references
are available.
6.5.4.5 Create parallels
With this function a parallel to existing lines can be generated (free
line, horizontal or vertical line).
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the 'Free line' function as follows.
2. Click with the left mouse button on the reference line (existing line) desired as a base line.
3. Then click with the left mouse button on any other point in the diagram
which has the desired parallel distance as a basis.
=> A parallel to the selected base line is calculated and drawn with the
same length as the base line.
4. Change the parallel distance between the two lines as required in the
Properties dialog box:
6-54
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Figure 6-19: Enter parallel distance of lines
The X/Z co-ordinates can no longer be changed here because this line
has a reference to a basis. The same applies to the basis of this parallel.
6.5.4.6 Create perpendicular
A perpendicular to an existing line (free line, horizontal or vertical line)
can be created with this function.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the 'Line vertical' or 'Line horizontal' function.
2. Click the left mouse button on the reference line (existing line) desired
as a reference line. Select the third of the reference line (A, B or C) at
which the perpendicular is to intersect the basis.
3. Then click the left mouse button on any other point in the diagram.
=> A perpendicular to the selected base line is drawn symmetrically to the
base line with the same length as the base line (see schematic drawing).
The perpendicular is drawn at the outer range limits for ranges A and
C. The perpendicular is positioned at the centre of the middle range B.
base line
perpendicular
in area A
perpendicular
in area C
1/3
A
1/3
1/3
B
C
perpendicular
in area B
Figure 6-20: Schematic drawing for principle of perpendicular on base line
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-55
6.5.5 Calculated elements (fits)
6.5.5.1 Angle halving
An angle halving in the angle between two intersecting straight lines is
drawn with this function.
Function
Description
Angle halving
2. Click the cursor on the two straight lines one after the
other between which the angle halving is to be formed:
=> The angle halving is drawn in the larger angle α between
the two straight lines.
3. Click the right mouse button on the selected line to open
the corresponding Properties dialog box:
L1/L2 = any straight lines; W=angle halving
W
L2
α
α/2
β/2
β
L1
Figure 6-21: Schematic drawing angle halving
TIP
For the angle halving in the smaller angle β you simply create a perpendicular to the first angle halving!
6.5.5.2 Tangent to profile
The 'Tangent to profile' function calculates a tangent within a freely selectable range at the highest profile point in this range. The limits of
the range are set by mouseclicks. The profile point closest to the position you clicked on in Z direction is used as the limiter.
Function
Description
Tangent to
6-56
2. Click on the beginning and end point of the range to be
used for searching for the tangent:
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Function
Description
profile
=> The tangent and the tangent/profile point of intersection
are drawn.
3. Click with the right mouse button on the tangent to open
the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> The exact co-ordinates (beginning and end point) can be
read in and new defaults set in the Co-ordinates tab.
You can adapt the defaults for calculating the tangent later in the
Properties dialog. After closing the dialog box, the tangent is calculated and drawn with the new defaults.
Figure 6-22: Co-ordinates of the tangent on the profile
Dialog box
topic
Description
X1/Z1
Beginning point of the tangent
X2/Z2
End point of the tangent
Length
Drawn length of the tangent
Angle
Specification of the tangent angle (=angle between tangent
and zero line)
= tangent angle to be searched for with tangent with angle
specification
Evaluation
range [µm]
Width (diagonal) of the search window used for calculating the
gradient of the tangent (the distances between the measuring
points are added and compared with this default.)
Tip: Select a range which covers about 5 to 10 points in connection with the measuring point distance.
Tangent
with...
Selection with which criteria or defaults the tangents are to be
calculated:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-57
Example:
6.5.5.3 Creating regression lines
Regression line of
two points
The 'Set regression line' function calculates within a freely selectable
area on the profile line a mean straight line through the profile points
contained in that area. The limits of the area are set by mouseclicks.
The profile point closest to the position you clicked on in Z direction is
used as the limiter.
The limitation points themselves are generally not on the regression
line. The mathematical calculation is based on the method of the sum
of the smallest quadratic deviation.
Function
Description
Set regression line
2. Click the cursor on the first destination position on the
profile line:
=> A point is drawn temporarily as a range limit.
3. Click the cursor on the second destination position on the
profile line:
=> The regression line is calculated and drawn as described.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the selected regression line to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> the size of the outside area related to the length of the selected area can be adapted
(standard setting: 200%)
Regression line
from
segments
The 'Create regression line from segments' function calculates from
several freely selectable, unconnected segments on the profile line a
mean straight line through the said segments. The limits of the segments are set by mouseclicks. The profile point closest to the position
you clicked on in Z direction is used as the segment limiter.
Function
Description
Regression
6-58
profile line:
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Function
line from
segments
Description
profile line:
=> A point is drawn as the first segment limit
3. Click the cursor on the second destination position on
the profile line:
=> The first segment is drawn.
4. Repeat the operating steps 2 and 3 for every other
segment which is to be used for the regression line.
5. Click the right mouse button on any position in the profile window to terminate the function.
=> The regression line is calculated and drawn from the
given segments.
6. Click with the right mouse button on the selected regression line to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> The size of the outside area related to the length of the
selected area can be adapted (standard setting: 200%)
The regression lines can no longer be moved.
Attention!
Figure 6-23: Regression lines
6.5.5.4 Calculating arcs
The 'Arc bestfit' function calculates within a freely selectable area on
the profile line a profile arc representing the profile points contained in
the said area in the best possible way.
Determine arc
bestfit
The limits of the area are set by mouseclicks. The profile point closest
to the position you clicked on in Z direction is used as the limiter. In the
bestfit the limitation points are generally not on the arc. The mathematical calculation is based on the method of the sum of the least
squares deviation.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-59
Function
Description
Arc bestfit
2. Click with the cursor on the first destination position
on the profile line:
=> A point is drawn temporarily as a range limit.
3. Click the cursor on the second destination position
=> The arc bestfit is calculated as described above and
drawn as a profile arc .
4. Click with the right mouse button on the selected arc
to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> The form deviation can be displayed.
Determine arc
bestfit from segments
The 'Arc bestfit from segments' function calculates a bestfit arc from
several freely selectable, unrelated segments on the profile line which
best represents the profile points contained in these segments.
The limits of the segments are set by mouseclicks. The profile point
closest to the position you clicked on in Z-direction is used as the
segment limiter.
Function
Description
Arc bestfit
from segments
2. Click with the cursor on the first destination position on
the profile line:
=> A point is drawn as a segment limit.
the profile line:
=> The first segment is drawn.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional segment.
5. Click with the right mouse button in the profile window to
terminate the function
=> The arc bestfit is calculated and drawn in
6. Click with the right mouse button on the selected arc to
Determine arc
bestfit with fixed
radius
The 'Bestfit circle centre point' calculates a profile arc with a given radius within a freely selectable area.
The limits of the area are set by mouseclicks. The profile point closest
to the position you clicked on in Z direction is used as the limiter. In the
bestfit with fixed radius the limitation points are generally not on the
6-60
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
arc. The mathematical calculation is based on the method of the sum
of the least squares deviation.
Function
Description
1. Select the function by clicking on the icon button. The
following dialog box is opened for entering the radius:
Arc bestfit
circle centre
point
=> Enter a numerical value and confirm with [OK].
2. Click with the cursor on the first destination position on
the profile line:
=> A point is drawn as a range limit.
the profile line:
=> The arc bestfit is calculated as described above with the
prescribed radius and drawn in as a profile arc
=> The name, colour, and Z scale can be defined
The arc can no longer be moved.
Note
Figure 6-24: Calculate arc
The arc at point of intersection function calculates for example the deviation of the profile form on rounded edges within a given area from
the ideal circular form. The circle is created at a line intersection as follows.
Arc at point of intersection
See also Figure 6-25!
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-61
Function
Description
1. First set two regression lines (pos. 2) to the profile edges.
Arc at point
of intersection
2. Create a parallel (pos. 3) for every regression line. The
parallels are at the end of the edge (distance in the example: 4.500)
3. Set the point of intersection (pos. 4) between the two parallels.
4. Now select the function by clicking the icon button opposite. The following dialog box is opened for entering the
radius:
=> Enter the nominal radius and confirm with [OK].
5. Click with the cursor on the first range limit (pos. 5) on the
profile line:
6. Click the cursor on the second destination position on the
profile line:
=> The arc is then calculated with the given radius and drawn
in and the deviation is displayed (if the function is selected).
=> Activate the display of the form deviation.
4
5
3
6
2
5
1
2
3
Figure 6-25: Arc at point of intersection
6-62
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Pos.
Element
1
Profile line
2
Regression lines
3
Parallels to the regression lines
4
Point of intersection of the parallels
5
Range limits on the profile line for calculation of the
deviation
6
Profile form deviation circle to profile line
6.5.5.5 Fit sphere
The 'Fit sphere function' computes a sphere with a given radius within
a freely selectable area on the profile line.
The limits of this area (2 points) are set by mouseclicks. The profile
point closest to the position you clicked on in Z direction is used as the
limiter. The mathematical calculation is based on the method of the
sum of the least squares deviation.
The points of contact of the sphere with the profile can be used for further dimensionings.
Six different directions of movement of the sphere during fitting. This
also allows fitting to complex profiles.
Function
Description
Fit sphere
2. Select two points on the profile between which the
sphere is to lie. Click the cursor on the first destination position on the profile line:
on the profile line: The following dialog box is opened
to enter the radius of the sphere:
=> Enter a dimension for the radius.
=> Click the direction arrow on the right which describes
the desired fit direction for the sphere and confirm
with [OK].
=> The sphere is fit between the two profile edges and
comes to rest at the lowest point of the selected
movement direction.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-63
Figure 6-26: Fit sphere
6.5.5.6 Evaluate convexity
nd
The 'convexity' function calculates a 2 order parabola for a freely selectable area and fits it to the profile. The beginning and end points of
this area form a base line.
The form deviation of the profile to this parabola and the convexity as
a distance from the peak of the parabola to the base line are displayed.
Function
Description
Convexity
2. Select two points on the profile between which the
convexity is to be evaluated. Click the cursor on the
first destination position on the profile line:
=> The parabola is fit between the two profile edges and
the form deviation and convexity are displayed.
6-64
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
5
3
4
2
2
1
Figure 6-27: Evaluate convexity
Pos.
Description
1
Profile line
2
Parabola
3
Base line between beginning and end point
4
Convexity (distance between base line and peak of the para-bola)
5
Form deviation profile to parabola
Click with the right mouse button on the convexity element to open the
corresponding Properties dialog box:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-65
Co-ordinates tab:
Dialog box topic
Description
Quality
= quality statement for the fit
The dimension for the quality includes both the form deviation and the dispersion of the master data. In principle: the greater the value for the quality, the worse the fit
of the parabola.
Start position
Enter the concrete start position in [mm] starting from
the profile origin from which the convexity is to be evaluated.
Evaluation
length
Enter the evaluation length, starting with the start position in [mm] over which the convexity is to be evaluated.
Representation tab:
6-66
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Dialog box
topic
Description
Display deviation
If form deviation should be displayed, this function must
be activated (click on it).
Display tolerances
Activate the function if the characteristic tolerances are to
be displayed.
Scale
magnification
The value for magnification of the X axis in the form deviation display can be adapted here.
Characteristic
Select an additional display option for the characteristic.
The selected parameter is displayed. Select "no characteristic" if you do not want to display any of the options.
6.5.5.7 Sphere in Gothic arcs
The evaluation Spheres in Gothic arcs is used with worm gears (e.g.,
small contact points with large force transmission). Evaluation is performed with a graphic element which constructs the sphere and the
contact points. The function is only possible once on the profile.
The following elements must be defined before the function Sphere in
Gothic arcs can be used.
•
Minimum profile point
•
Left and right arc
(for the area of points of contact sphere-arc)
•
optional: point of intersection of both Gothic arcs
Go to Evaluation of Gothic arcs as follows:
See also the graphic below!
Action
Description
The profile is partially aligned. Two partial ranges right and
left of the contour of approximately 0.5 mm are sufficient.
Align partially
(if necessary)
Definition of a profile point in the minimum in the area of the
point of intersection of both Gothic arcs
Profile point
at minimum
Arc bestfit
Definition of both arcs (left and right), within which both contact points are located (elements [1] and [2] in the graphic
below).
The limits of these arcs are specified exactly in a dialog box
and are transferred to the graphic.
This function first opens a dialog box for the exact entry of
constructive specifications for the Gothic arcs.
Sphere
Gothic arcs
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-67
Action
Description
Enter the exact range limits for both arcs in reference to the
profile minimum.
Enter the radius of the sphere.
If all data are plausible the "falling" sphere is calculated after
closing the dialog box with [OK]. The contact points spherearc (not: sphere-profile) are calculated and drawn.
Plausible means:
=> minimum point and arc are available
=> given sphere radius is smaller than the radius of the
two arcs
=> distance of the centre points of the two arcs is not too
great
Now all basic elements are available for further evaluations.
Set the line
as basis for
angular calculation
1)
A vertical line from the centre of the sphere is to be defined
as basis for angular calculation.
Two ways are possible:
1. a perpendicular through the centre of the sphere
2. a line (free line) from the centre of the sphere to the
point of intersection of both Gothic arcs.
Vertical
2)
Free line
=> Always select the centre of the sphere first and then
the point of intersection!
Tip:
If the Profile minimum points and point of intersection
Gothic arcs are too close together, a better selection of the
point of intersection is obtainable by zooming in the Xdirection.
(=> determine the
point of intersection of
both arcs beforehand !)
Setting the
two lines
from the
sphere centre to the
6-68
With the Free line element function, both lines from the centre of the circle to both contact points are defined.
The contact points were determined when calculating the
sphere and plotted in the graphic.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Action
Description
contact
points
sphere-arc
First select the circle centre point and then one of the two
contact points.
=> The lines are drawn
Free line
Calculating
angles and
distances
With the aid of both of these functions, calculate the three
angles (elements 3 to 5) and the four distances
(elements 6 to 9), which are required for evaluating the profile (see the graphic below for element assignment).
See also the general description for definition of these characteristics.
Inside angle
on straight
lines
Free distance
Figure 6-28: Evaluation of Gothic arcs
To check the correctness of the set elements, you can simply shift the
profile. All elements and dimensionings must move with it as these refer
to the profile! If points of intersection are not selected carefully, these
elements remain on their point of origin in the graphic (=error).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Test
6-69
Figure 6-29: Element list evaluation of Gothic arcs
TIP
Name all elements and characteristics specifically (point, circle, left,
right, etc.). This makes references clear.
6.5.6 Compare profiles
This function enables a profile comparison between any profile and a
master profile.
The following can be used as a master profile:
•
Measured profile (e.g., from setting master)
•
Imported DXF profile
When using an imported DXF profile, the measuring conditions with
which this profile was measured must be checked. Refer to the accompanying notes.
The general sequence for a profile comparison is as follows:
6-70
•
Load the master profile or import the DXF profile
•
Specify the fitting ranges on the master profile (in which the measured
profile should later fit in) or set pilot point.
•
Specify the profile segments within which both profiles are to be compared with each other
•
Define the settings for displaying the results of the profile comparison
and save as Autorun
•
Measure comparison profile or load from the hard disk
•
Start Automatic evaluation and Evaluate results
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
6.5.6.2 Fit criteria
Alignment ranges
defined
=> Fitting takes place according to alignment
ranges.
Bestfit ranges defined
=> Fitting takes place according to these fit
ranges.
No alignment ranges
/ Fit ranges are defined
=> 60% of the profile length is used to fit (total
profile length minus 20% of pretravel and
overtravel each)
Pilot point
=> only the pilot points are used for fitting.
Measured profile is
fixed
=> Fitting of the profile is not possible.
The anchor function as well as auto-evaluation can also be used without
profile fit!
6.5.6.3 Work steps
The profile fitting over fitting ranges is described here. Proceed in the
same way if a pilot point is used. Information about setting a pilot point
can be found in subsection Set pilot point, page 6-50.
Step 1: Load master profile/Import DXF profile
1. Return to the screen form of TURBO WAVE.
2. When the profile should be compared with an imported DXF profile, the
measuring conditions with which this profile was measured must be
checked.
Load master profile/import DXFprofile
To do this, open the Measuring conditions dialog box with F7 and check
whether the settings for both profiles match:
General tab:
Traverse length (sampling length) => should match the DXF profile length.
Measured value interval => set as desired for the later measurement
Probe tab:
Measuring range => should also be the same.
3. Select the Evaluate after measuring run: automatic function in the Program sequence dialog box(Settings menu) in the Contour tab.
4. Save the measuring program under an appropriate name.
5. Change to the evaluation window using F11.
Now load either a master profile from the hard disk (File menu => Load profile)
or import a DXF profile (File menu => Import profile from DXF file). The profile
is displayed in the evaluation window.
Step 2: Define fit ranges on master profile
The fit ranges on the master profile for the profile comparison are defined by the following functions:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Define fit ranges
on master profile
6-71
• Align partially function
or
• Bestfit fit ranges function (in case of real form differences)
or
• automatic if no fit range is defined
Select suitable profile sections as fit ranges. These sections should be
reliably identical with the measured profile. Profile sections where wear
differences could occur should not be used for fitting as otherwise a
wear evaluation cannot be carried out.
Work steps:
1. Switch on the Align and Bestfit functions toolbars for viewing.
2. Now define the fit ranges either by partial alignment or with the Bestfit fit
ranges function.
Align partially:
Click on this function with the left mouse button to select suitable segments for fitting the measured profile. Adopt these segments by clicking
with the right mouse button (function has ended).
Bestfit fit ranges:
Specify the desired partial lengths for fitting per mouse click (analogous to
partial aligning).
Example: Two fit ranges
Figure 6-30: Define fit ranges on the profile
Define comparison ranges
Step 3: Define comparison ranges
Define the segments on the profile line which should be later compared with the measured profile.
1. Select the Profile comparison function (on the element bar or in the Evaluate menu) and click the left mouse button on the desired range limits. Only
partial segments should be selected if the transitional sections of the
length are undefined.
2. The function must be selected again for each additional segment.
6-72
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Example: 2 comparison ranges
Figure 6-31: Define comparison ranges on the profile
3. Use the right mouse button to call up the Properties dialog box for each
profile segment. The settings must be specified for each segment.
4. Set the colour of the profile comparison in the "Properties" tab (with its
own colour of the colour of the layer level).
Define properties
of the comparison
ranges
5. Change to the "Representation" tab. The following settings are preferred:
Dialog box
topic
Description
Display deviation
If form deviation should be displayed, this function must
be activated (click on it).
Type of display for form
deviation:
linear
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
on the profile
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-73
Dialog box
topic
Description
View of the
display
points
Select how many measuring points are to be output from
the list:
all => every measuring point
th
fine: every 10 measuring point
th
medium: every 20 measuring point
th
coarse: 2% every 50 measuring point
Scale of
magnification
in X direction
X 10
Characteristic
X 40
Indicate if the profile comparison in the forms should be
visible as a characteristic.
Attention!
Tolerance values can only be entered for the profile
comparison later if the representation is active as a
characteristic.
Confirm all inputs with OK. The dialog box is closed.
Enter comparison
tolerances
Step 4: Enter comparison tolerances
Use the right mouse button to open the Properties dialog box for each
individual comparison segment.
Now enter the tolerances for the form deviation in the Characteristics
tab: The tab is only displayed if a representation has been activated
as a characteristic first in the tab.
Confirm with [OK].
6-74
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Creating elements
Step 5: Save autorun
The settings on the master profile are now saved as Autorun (automatic evaluation) in the active measuring program.
Save autorun
Activate the button or select the "Save auto-evaluation" from the "Evaluation" menu.
Also save the measuring program using the command "Save measuring program as…" in the "File" menu.
Step 6: Do measurement or load saved profile
1. Record profile:
If the stylus is already on the workpiece and was correctly aligned previously, a measurement can be started with F5 from the evaluation window.
2. Load profile
Load a previously saved profile from the hard disk into the evaluation window.
Both profiles are shown in the graphic:
Step 7: Start automatic evaluation
In case of automatic evaluation after the measuring run the profile
comparison is started automatically with the master profile.
Start automatic
evaluation
When the function is deactivated or the measurement was started from
the adjustment window, the auto-evaluation must be manually started in
the evaluation window (button or command in the "Evaluation" menu).
The profile comparison is carried out and the form deviations are displayed in the graphic:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-75
6.5.6.4 Fit profile manually (fine fit, optional)
If the profile has not been fit optimally by the fit functions, a manual
fine fitting to the master profile can be performed additionally.
The fine fitting toolbar is switched on by the View menu, submenu
Evaluation bar, Fine fitting command switched on.
As soon as this toolbar is displayed (active), the profile can be shifted
as follows with the keys of the PC keyboard:
Linear shift in X and
Y direction
Rotate around the
profile centre
With the 4 arrow keys (cursor keys), the profile is
moved one step per click in the specified direction
with the set step width.
With the Page↑/Page↓ keys the profile is rotated
one step per click in the specified direction with
the set step angle. The rotation axis is the profile
centre.
This button opens the dialog box for entering the
desired step width in [µm] or the step angle in [°].
Alternatively a profile shift can be performed by clicking the individual
buttons of the toolbar with the mouse.
6.6 Calculating characteristics
6.6.1 Introduction
Characteristics embody calculated contour dimensions which are plotted into the profile window as a result of the evaluation and are included in the element list. Depending on characteristic type, you first
need to create elements in order to calculate the characteristics from
them.
All available characteristic functions are thematically grouped on three
toolbars:
•
Distance functions
•
Radius calculations
•
Angle calculations
By default, the toolbars are displayed in a vertical array at the left-hand
margin of the screen. They can also be shown and hidden (see Adapt
settings subsection Adapting settings , page 6-29) or by dragging to
any position on the screen with the mouse.
The following functions are used in the same way as described for the
elements (see subsection General element functions, page 6-43):
6-76
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Calculating characteristics
•
Create/calculate characteristic
•
Characteristic properties
•
Select characteristic
•
Delete characteristic
The following subsections detail how the individual characteristics are
created or calculated.
6.6.1.1 Position dimension figure
The dimension of a characteristic is represented graphically in the profile window with projection lines and the dimension figure. You can position the dimensioning more or less wherever you want using the
mouse, in order to avoid possible overlaps and to produce a clearer
graphic.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired characteristic
2. Press the left mouse button and drag the whole dimensioning to the
desired position in the profile window
=> extension lines are also moved or redrawn to get the assignment of
the dimension figure to the characteristic
6.6.1.2 Edit characteristic properties
In the same way as for the elements, you can change the name, colours
and co-ordinates for each characteristic in the Properties dialog box.
But since the characteristics represent the quality of the contour, tolerance limits and a rated dimension for the characteristic can be specified additionally.
Mark the desired characteristic in the graphic or in the element list and
then press the right mouse button. The Properties dialog box is opened.
The following functions are available in the Characteristic tab:
Figure 6-32: Characteristic tolerances
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-77
Dialog box
topic
Description
Nom. value
Enter the nominal dimension for the characteristic.
Tolerance
upper/lower
Enter the upper and lower tolerance limits (as absolute
values) for the dimension of the characteristic.
Result
Display the actual dimension for the characteristic as calculated by the software.
Rating
Display a rating as the result of a comparison between actual dimension and tolerance limits.
Possible ratings:
> Upper tolerance / Good / < Lower tolerance
Decimal places
Enter the number of decimal places to which you want to
display the dimension in the profile window (between 0
and 6).
Dimension figure
Horizontally
Choose whether the dimension figure is to be displayed
horizontal or according to the shape of the dimension line
(e.g. rotated to vertical for a vertical distance) in the profile
window.
Tolerances,
relative
If this function is activated, the tolerances may only be entered relatively as a difference from the nominal dimension!
Tolerance data can also be entered in the Characteristic tolerances dialog box for all characteristics!
6.6.1.3 Define tolerances for characteristics
The following dialog box is opened with the Evaluate => Characteristic
tolerances menu:
Figure 6-33: Characteristics dialog box
All characteristics previously formed in the evaluation are listed in the
list. In this dialog box the characteristics-properties can be changed for
all characteristics in a dialog box. The entries are transferred in the
6-78
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Properties dialog box of the individual characteristics (and also vice
versa), and are displayed in the element list as well as in the screen
form in the form field "characteristics".
Explanations of the tolerance specifications can be found here , page
6-77.Edit characteristic properties
6.6.2 Computing distances
Distances can be set between two different elements - of which at
least one must be a point.
The calculation of distance characteristics is divided into three groups:
1. Horizontal distance (X distance)
2. Vertical distance (Z distance)
3. Free distance in the X/Z plane
Point - point
Distance between the two points
Point - straight line
Perpendicular distance between a point and a
straight line.
Point - arc
Distance between a point and the centre point of a
circle.
Distance definitions
Depending on the chosen distance function, the X, Z or absolute distance in the X/Z plane is then created according to the above definition.
The elements whose distances are to be determined relative to each
other must have been created before you call up the characteristic function.
Notes
One point must always be available as an element!
6.6.2.1 Work steps
Function
Procedure
1. Select the function with the appropriate button.
Horizontal
distance
2. Click the cursor on the first element (point, straight line or
arc).
=> The position is saved
=> The X or Z distance between the two points is calculated
and entered as a horizontal or vertical distance dimension.
Vertical distance
4. Click with the right mouse button on the selected distance
dimension to open the corresponding Properties dialog
box:
=> Name and colour can be changed
=> The tolerance band can be entered
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-79
Function
Procedure
1. Select the function with this button.
free
distance
2. Click the cursor on the first element (point, straight line or
arc).
=> The position is saved.
=> The absolute distance between the two points in the X/Z
plane is calculated and entered as a dimension.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the selected distance
dimension to open the corresponding Properties dialog
box:
Figure 6-34: Distances
6.6.3 Computing radii
A radius computation is possible for circles or circle segments which
have already been projected in the evaluation window. However, radii
can also be computed for one or more profile segments without previous element creation.
The calculation of radius characteristics is divided into three groups:
1. Radius from a profile segment
2. Radius from several non-linked profile segments
3. Radius from an arc element
6-80
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
6.6.3.1 Worksteps
Function
Procedure
Radius from
profile segment
profile line:
the profile line:
=> The radius dimension from the profile arc is drawn in
4. Click the right mouse button on the selected radius
characteristic to open the corresponding Properties dialog box:
=> Representation attributes can be defined
=> Form deviation can be displayed
Radius from
several profile segments
profile line:
=> A point is drawn as the first segment limit
the profile line:
=> The selected segment is drawn.
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for each additional segment.
5. Then click the right mouse button on any position in the
profile window to terminate the function.
=> The arc is calculated from the selected segments and
drawn in with its radius dimension
=> Tolerance band can be entered
2. Click the cursor on an existing arc element.
Radius from
arc
element
=> the radius for this arc is calculated and drawn in as a
dimension
=> Tolerance band can be entered
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-81
Figure 6-35: Radii
6.6.4 Calculating angles
Angles can be calculated between two intersecting straight lines. They
can be generated directly on the profile or based on existing line elements (profile line, regression line, etc.).
Calculation of angle characteristics is divided into:
Angle definitions
•
Inside angle
•
Outside angle
Angle on profile
Inside or outside angle between the intersecting regression lines formed by definition of profile segments.
Angle on lines
Inside or outside angle between the intersecting lines
which already exist as elements (all line types, regression
lines).
6.6.4.1 Work steps
Function
Procedure
Angle on profile:
2. Click the cursor on the first destination position on
the profile line:
=> A point is drawn on as the first range limit for the
first mean straight line
Inside angle
3. Click the cursor on the second destination position on the profile line:
=> The first mean straight line is calculated and
drawn in
6-82
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Function
Procedure
Outside angle
4. Repeat work steps 2 and 3 to create the second
mean straight line.
=> The inner or outer angle between both lines is calculated immediately in the connection and drawn
in with its dimension.
5. Click the right mouse button on the selected angle characteristic to open the corresponding
Angle on straight
lines
2. Select two consecutive line elements.
=> The inner or outer angle between both elements is
calculated immediately and drawn in with its dimension
Inside angle
3. Click the right mouse button on the selected angle characteristic to open the corresponding
Outside angle
If the axis scaling differs, the graphical representation and the calculated
results will not match. The dimension figures always indicate the calculated, actual angle dimensions in the proportional axis ratio!
Note
Figure 6-36: Calculate angle
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-83
6.6.5 Display profile form deviation
6.6.5.1 General/representation options
The toolbar Profile form deviation contains various buttons which enable fast display of these profile form deviations.
In this way the form deviation can be represented quickly as a max.
deviation from the mean value on existing elements in the contour
evaluation.
Dialog box topic
Description
Display deviation
If form deviation should be displayed, this function
must be activated (click on it).
linear/on the profile
Display tolerances
Activate the function when the characteristic tolerances
are to be displayed.
Representation
display points
The following options can be selected for the number
of points to be selected:
all / fine / medium / coarse
Scale magnification X
The value for the magnification of the X axis can be
adapted here in the display of the form deviation.
Characteristic
=> The tolerances display must be activated first!
Select an additional display option for the form deviation characteristic. The selected parameter is displayed. Select "no characteristic" if you do not want any
of the options displayed.
Roughness parameters:
The roughness parameters according to the roughness
measuring conditions and the selected parameters in
the measuring program are displayed.
If the roughness is evaluated on several profile segments, the same measuring conditions (filter) are al-
6-84
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Dialog box topic
Description
ways applied. This also applies for the auto-evaluation.
Temporarily the measuring conditions can be changed
later and the evaluation on this profile segment recomputed.
Evaluation by
segment sections
If elements or fits are computed from several segments, the form deviation is displayed over the whole
area (segments and profile areas between). Activate
this function to hide the display of the form deviation for
the contour between the segments.
6.6.5.2 Straightness
An ideal straight line (regression line) is used to evaluate the straightness of a profile segment. This regression line must be created beforehand. The distance of the profile from this ideal straight line is displayed as a form deviation.
1. Select the function by clicking on the icon button. (Switch on Profile form
deviation toolbar!)
2. Click the cursor on any position of the regression lines within the area to
be evaluated.
3. Then a dialog box is opened for defining the representation of the characteristic:
The "max. deviation from the mean value" option in the characteristic (in
the top right of the dialog box) is already selected. You only have to define
the display properties in the left section.
4. Close the dialog box. The form deviation is displayed.
6.6.5.3 Profile form deviation
An arc is used to evaluate the profile form deviation of a profile
area. The distance of the profile from this element is displayed as a
form deviation.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-85
The work steps are identical to those in straightness. An arc merely
has to be selected instead of a straight line.
6.6.5.4 Parallelism of the centre lines
Two regression lines (ideal straight lines) are used to evaluate the
parallelism of profile segments. The first regression line is used as a
basis (= angle to the zero line) of the calculation. The parallel deviation
of the second straight line to this basis is represented as a distance.
1. Select the function by clicking on the icon button. (Switch off the Profile
form deviation toolbar!)
2. Click the left mouse button on the first regression line.
3. Click the left mouse button on the second regression line.
4. The parallelism deviation is calculated and drawn.
Other settings (display, tolerances) are possible in the Properties dialog box for this feature analogously with straightness.
6.6.6 Evaluate workpiece edges
6.6.6.1 Definition of terms
With this function, workpiece edges (chamfer, rounding, groove etc.)
are measured and evaluated according to ISO 13715.
The dimension "a" is given an appropriate sign depending on the type
of edge and the burr direction specified.
Symbol for identifying workpiece edges:
a: burr direction
vertical to symbol
a: any burr direction
a: burr direction
horizontal to symbol
Sign for a
Meaning for
outer edge
6-86
inner edge
+
burred
transition
-
burr-free
denudation
±
either burred or
burr-free
transition or denudation
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Examples:
Edge
Condition
Outside
edge
burr-free
burred
sharp-edged
Denudation
(chamfer or
rounding:
Overhang (burr):
Denudation or
overhang almost
zero:
Transition (chamfer or rounding):
Denudation or
transition almost
zero:
sign: -
Denudation
(groove):
Inside
edge
Example graphic:
+/-0.1
-0.3
-0.5
Edge
Description
+/- 0.1
Outside edge either
burred up to 0.1 mm
or burr-free up to 0.1
mm, any burr direction
-0.3
Outside edge burrfree up to 0.3 mm,
any denudation
direction
-0.5
Inside edge with denudation up to 0.5
mm, denudation direction horizontal
6.6.6.2 Work steps edge evaluation
1. Set the two regression lines at the profile edges, the point of intersection
of which forms the edge to be evaluated.
2. Select the Evaluate workpiece edge function with the button opposite.
3. Click on the two previously set regression lines one after another.
4. The following dialog box is opened after the second click:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-87
Dialog box
topic
Description
Type (of edge)
Select whether an outside edge or an inside edge is to be
measured.
Value 1
Enter the required evaluation type according to drawing
specifications (+/-, see also symbol for identifying workpiece edges under Definition of termssubsection
Definition of terms, page 6-86)
Value 2
no meaning as yet
Direction
Select the direction (surface reference) to be evaluated.
Evaluation two directions:
1. Value 1 equal for both directions => select "both". The
evaluation is then performed for both directions in one
work step.
2. Value 1 different for every direction => select the
workpiece edge characteristic separately once each
for vertical and for horizontal.
3. After exiting the dialog box the edge evaluation is performed and the
characteristic displayed on the profile. A tolerance can be specified for this
value independently of the default from the drawing (in the Properties dialog
box of this characteristic; click right mouse button). A certain burr can be
allowed additionally with this.
6.6.6.3 Result representation edge
Graphic representation of the results of the edge evaluation in the contour window:
6-88
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Auto-evaluation
A burr of 0.001 mm was measured in the example. The two parallels
embody the value 1 defaulted in the dialog box (-0.1).
The two points of intersection of the parallels with the profile line are
essential for the measuring result. In the example shown below this is
the point of intersection with the vertical profile edge. The burr of 0.001
mm is well visible in the detailed representation:
6.7 Auto-evaluation
6.7.1 General
If you have defined evaluations on a profile which you want to apply to
other profiles, you can do so quickly and easily using the "Autoevaluation" function.
This function is well suited to repeat measurements on workpieces of
the same type with a reproducible form. The position of the workpieces
(starting point of the repeat measurement) must not vary by more than
10% in reference to the overall length of the measurement. A fixture
with stop should be used for positioning the workpieces.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-89
The auto-evaluation can be performed both with and without anchor
function (setting of an anchor). The software uses an image recognition method and fits the saved evaluation to the measured profile in
the best possible way.
Additional fitting of the profile is only necessary when profile comparison elements should be used to display form deviation (see also subsection Compare profiles, page 6-70).
TIP
Characteristics of the profile comparison are calculation-intensive in
their display and can delay the evaluation.
Remedy: Reduce the number of measuring points in the "Measuring
conditions" dialog box. Select a rougher view of the display points in the
Properties dialog box of the profile comparison:
Notes
The anchor function as well as auto-evaluation can also be used without
profile fit!
Displaying the master profile:
The master profile is stored automatically in layer 16 (switched off by default). Switch on this level for display when the master profile should be
visible. For better display, select another colour in the "layer" dialog box
for this layer.
Statistics:
The auto-dimensioning (with or without anchor) can be repeated several
times after a measurement on the same profile. Only the characteristic
data from the last carried out evaluation goes into the statistics.
6.7.2 Work steps
6.7.2.1 View after auto-evaluation
Select the View after auto-run command in the Settings menu to set the
zoom options for representing a contour after automatic evaluation.
Figure 6-37: Zoom settings for profile after automatic evaluation
6-90
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Auto-evaluation
Function
Remarks
Auto 100%
The program automatically selected the 100% zoom.
Current setting
The program adopts the currently selected zoom setting (most recent setting).
Zoom settings
When this function is active you can define fixed
zoom settings in the right section:
1. Horizontal and vertical zoom steps can be set
separately
2. Definition of the centre point of the display window (co-ordinates X and Z axis. This selects the
profile segment which is to be zoomed.
6.7.2.2 Auto-evaluation without anchor
Function
Remarks
Save autoevaluation:
Select the function with this button (or the "Save
auto-evaluation" command in the Evaluate menu)
to save the evaluation reactions performed on the
profile.
The complete profile with dimensioning is saved
as master profile in layer 16. Only the profile line
and the anchor can be displayed.
The evaluation is assigned to the measuring program and is then available as auto-run.
Start autoevaluation:
Switch on the master profile for display (layer 16).
Automatic start:
Go to the screen form and select the "Automatic
evaluation after measuring run" function in the
Program sequence (Contour tab). Then the autoevaluation is started after every measurement.
Manual start:
If the evaluation after measuring run is set to
manual or semi-automatic in the program sequence, start the previously saved auto-evaluation
for the newly measured profile by clicking on the
opposite button.
All saved evaluation actions including statistics are
applied to the new profile and displayed.
6.7.2.3 Auto-evaluation with anchor
Function
Remarks
Set anchor:
With the aid of the anchor function you can set a
significant point for the auto-evaluation to which
the evaluation actions (elements and characteristics) are placed in relation.
and
Save autoevaluation
In this way you can compensate for the frequent
problem of shifts on the X-axis in repeat measurements on different items of a workpiece type
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-91
Function
Remarks
(tolerance fluctuations, non-repeatable workpiece
mountings, etc).
1. Load the master profile
2. Select the "Set anchor" function and click on
the desired anchor position in the evaluation
window.
=> The anchor point is drawn in the shape of an
arrow and is included in the element list. In the
Properties dialog box (click right mouse button) you can also adjust the co-ordinates of
the anchor point precisely.
3. Save the master profile again as an autoevaluation.
Carry out autoevaluation with anchor
Start the auto-evaluation => the mouse pointer
turns into an anchor symbol
Click with the left mouse button on the point on
the measured profile from where the autoevaluation with anchor should be started (should
correspond to the anchor point in the master profile)
The saved auto-evaluations are then carried out
automatically, plotted, and listed in the element list
from this point.
This sequence can be repeated several times with
another starting point => first delete all evaluations in
the element list and start the auto-evaluation again
until the evaluation is satisfactory
6.7.2.4 Delete auto-evaluation
Delete autoevaluation
6-92
This function is used to delete the auto-evaluation
currently saved in the measuring program.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Exit contour evaluation
6.8 Exit contour evaluation
6.8.1 Exit contour evaluation window
Press function key F12. The current profile evaluation is transferred to
the "Profile Contour" form. The evaluated characteristics are entered
in the "Parameters" form object. Then they must be selected for display in the form. (see subsection Form object parameters, page3-22)
Profile from evaluation window:
You can map details of the profile evaluation with the ”Profile from
evaluation window” form. To do so, you must first set the profile segment you want to detail using the zoom function in the profile window.
When you exit the TURBO CONTOUR evaluation window with F12 a
new ”Profile form evaluation window” form field is generated in the
screen form, showing the segment currently in the profile window.
6.8.2 Save contour evaluation
The results of the profile evaluation are saved with the profile.
There are two ways to save a profile:
Data format TURBO WAVE (Hwp):
Exit the TURBO CONTOUR evaluation window and return to the
screen form of TURBO WAVE. All evaluations are saved automatically. Then save the measuring results with F4 or the command Save
measuring results in the Profile menu. All results are saved in the Hwp
format.
Data format TURBO CONTOUR (prf):
Select the Save profile as command in the File menu in the TURBO
CONTOUR evaluation window in TURBO WAVE. The current profile is
then saved in the old data format of TURBO CONTOUR under a freely
selectable name on the hard disk. Then the measuring results of other
software programs which can only read this format can still be used.
6.8.3 Print results
You can print the measurement results and evaluations in various
ways. You can print either the entire form or only the profile graphic
including evaluations.
You can generate a printout either by way of function key F9 or by
choosing the "Print" command from the File menu. More details
about printing screen and printout forms and profile graphics can be
found in subsection Menu file, page 6-24.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
6-93
Introduction
7 Evaluation of topography
7.1 Introduction
The topography function enables recording of the three-dimensional
structure of the workpiece surface.
Either a positioning table (Y positioner) or a rotary feed (waverotor) is
used for the topography measurement. The workpiece is then positioned relative to the probe over a total measuring distance Y with a
certain step width. The single measurements made in this way are
grouped to form one comprehensive picture. HOMMEL MAP software
is required for the representation, evaluation and printout of the surface.
7.1.1 Settings
7.1.1.1 Program sequence
TURBO WAVE requires special information which applies for the topography. These settings are specified in the Topography tab ("Create measuring program" mode, "Settings" menu, "Program sequence"
command).
The following parameters must be set for optimum capture of the surface:
Figure 7-1: Topography settings
All the data for the sequence of the positioning run must be entered in
the left section of the Topography tab (see table).
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
7-1
Evaluation of topography
Input topic
Explanatory notes
Topography ON
To perform a topography measurement, activate
the "Topography ON" check box.
Y positioner
Define whether a Y positioner or rotary table is
used for positioning the workpiece.
Rotary table
Traverse
The traverse length currently set in the measuring conditions is displayed here.
Offset waveline [mm]
Specify a distance the waveline traverse unit
should be away from the left limit switch
=> the waveline traverses by this offset value before the measurement from the limit switch in
measuring direction
Number of measurements
Enter the number of measuring runs which need
to be performed to capture the total surface.
The number of measurements is associated with
the total trace width and step width as follows:
Step width =
Total trace width / (number of measurements -1)
Total trace width [mm] /
[°]
Enter a total trace width or step width of the positioner in positioning direction.
Step width [µm] / [°]
Y positioner: [mm] or [µm]
Rotary table: [°]
Note:
Only one of the two values needs to be specified. The third missing variable is calculated
automatically and entered in the dialog box with
the linking with the number of measurements!
Positioning direction
Selection of the positioning direction
=> The assignment right/left is marked on the
positioning table/rotary table!
Delay (Nanosw.) [ms]
Entry of a maintenance or delay time before
starting the measurement
The application is designed exclusively for the
“Nanoswing” probe for taking the transient time
for its tuning fork into account.
Start topographical
evaluation
When this function is activated the software installed on the evaluation computer for topographic evaluation (e.g. HOMMEL MAP) is started
automatically after a topography measuring run.
7.1.1.2 Data format
Since the HOMMEL MAP evaluation software only supports data format *.par, this format must be selected before the topography measurement!
Select the option PAR in the screen form in the Options/Data format
menu.
7-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
The wavecontour probe may not be used for topography measurements
because their measuring results cannot be saved in *.par format at the
moment.
Attention!
7.1.2 Performing the adjustment
Go from the screen form to the adjustment window with F6.
If the Autosave function is not yet activated in the program sequence,
you get the following message:
The function is activated automatically with [YES].
For adjustment of the topography measurement, the function "Topography ON" must be deactivated in the Program sequence/Topography tab
!(see also Figure 7-1)
Important!
The adjustment run for a topography measurement is identical to the
run for the roughness measurement. You will find detailed explanations in subsection Measuring run adjustment , page 4-23!
The adjustment window for the topography measurement looks likes
this:
2
1
3
1
Figure 7-2:
Adjustment window topography measurement
Explanations about the topography adjustment window:
Pos.
Explanation
1
Identification that a topography measurement is in progress here
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
7-3
Evaluation of topography
Pos.
Explanation
2
Display of current position (measuring path) of the Y positioner or
rotary table:
Y positioner: "Y"= ........ mm
Rotary table: "rot" = ....... °
N = number of measurements to be made
Vt = positioning speed of the linear traverse unit
Lt = traverse length
3
Number of measurements already made of the total (progress bar)
You will find further information about the functions in the Measure +
Adjustment windows in subsection Adjustment and measuring
7.1.3 Making the topography measurement
After the adjustment, the topography measurement can be started directly from the adjustment window or from the screen form with F5.
The measured value recording runs according to the set defaults
automatically. The progress of the measurement is displayed dynamically in the profile graphic in the adjustment window.
7.1.4 Start topographical evaluation
To evaluate the topography measured values the separate HOMMEL
MAP is used as a standard. This can be started as follows:
Automatic Start
Activate the Start topographical evaluation function in the Topography tab in the Program sequence.
After a complete topography measurement run the HOMMEL MAP
evaluation software is started.
Manual start
7-4
Select the Topogr. analysis command in the screen form in the View
menu. The software installed respectively on the evaluation computer
is started for topographical analysis.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction
8 Measurement position management
8.1 Introduction
8.1.1 Philosophy
The measurement position management allows combination of several
measurement tasks at different measurement positions of a workpiece
within the same measuring program.
In this way measurement tasks can be structured clearly and preprepared objects re-used repeatedly for parameters, measuring conditions and program sequences. These objects need then only be assigned to the measurement position. Several measurement positions
can used on one and the same object (e.g. measuring conditions).
A CNC program can then process different measurement positions on
one workpiece one after another with the same measuring program.
New measuring programs do not have to be created or called every
time. In addition individual measurements can be selected or deselected for measurement.
With the parameter table form object, the results of the measurements
over all measurement positions can be output on completion of a
complete CNC run in a collective report.
Meas.position
management
Measuring
condition objects
Parameter
objects
Program
sequence objects
Data export
objects
Measuring
conditions 1
Parameters 1
Program
sequence 1
Data export 1
Measuring
conditions 2
Parameters 2
Program
sequence 2
Data export 2
Measuring
conditions 3
Parameters 3
Program
sequence 3
Data export 3
Pre-defined objects are assigned to the
measurement positions
Meas.position 1
Measuring
conditions 1
Parameters 1
Program
sequence 1
Data export 1
Parameters 1
Program
sequence 2
Data export 2
Parameters 2
Program
sequence 3
Data export 3
Meas.position 2
Meas.
conditions 1
Meas.position 3
Measuring
conditions 2
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
8-1
Measurement position management
8.1.2 Measurement position plan
In the Measurement position management dialog box the components
of the measurement position plan are defined and allocated.
Call the Measurement position management dialog box under the
menu Settings/Measurement position management.
Figure 8-1: Dialog box for measurement position management (object view)
The working window is divided into two sections:
•
left hand window: tree structure of object types
•
right hand window: display of the existing objects of the type selected in
the left hand window
Description of the toolbar:
Button
Meaning
Switch to object view (see figure above)
Switch to detailed view of the objects (line by line representation with name and type specification)
Create new object
Open selected object for editing
Delete selected object
Copy selected object and insert immediately (duplicate)
Several objects can be copied simultaneously.
Copy selected objects n times (multiply)
The number n is prompted.
8-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Objects
The functions of the toolbar are also available for the selected object
in the context menu displayed with the right hand mouse button.
Additionally there is also a command 'Rename' to adapt the names of
the objects later.
8.2 Objects
8.2.1 General
The measurement position management includes the following object
types:
•
•
Parameters
•
Program sequence
•
Data export
Any number of objects of every type adapted to the respective
measurement task can be created.
A suitable object of every type is then adapted to a measurement position. Several measurement positions can also use one and the same
object (e.g. measuring conditions).
When installing the software, a 'Standard' measurement position and a
'Standard' object for every object type are created automatically.
These standard objects can also be modified and renamed.
Before the objects can be assigned to the measurement positions
these must be defined individually.
To do this, modify the standard objects or create other new objects.
8.2.2 Measuring conditions
Click in the left hand working window on the Measurement positions
object type.
All already created measurement position objects are displayed in the
right hand window. The Standard object always exists and is preset for
the measuring condition mode Roughness and Contour.
Open the dialog box for setting the measuring conditions for this standard object with a double click and enter the desired settings.
If you are creating a new object, the wizard guides you through the
first steps. You then assign a suitable object name first and define the
mode for the measuring conditions.
The actual dialog for defining the measuring conditions is then identical to the Settings/Measuring conditions dialog (see subsection
Defining measuring conditions , page 3-27 )
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
8-3
Measurement position management
8.2.3 Parameters
Click in the left hand working window on the Parameters object type.
All already created parameter objects are displayed in the right hand
window. The standard object always exists and contains several defaults for the roughness profile and the Rk profile.
Open the dialog box for defining the parameters for this standard object with a double click and enter the desired settings.
If you are creating a new object, the wizard will guide you through the
first steps. Then you assign a suitable object name first and define all
the parameters and settings to be determined.
The actual dialog for defining the parameters is identical to the dialog
Settings/Parameters (see section Settings Parameters , page 3-17)
8.2.4 Program sequence
Click in the left hand working window on the object type Program sequence.
All the already created program run objects are displayed in the right
hand window. The standard object always exists and contains no defaults. Only the 'Return trav. unit after measuring run' and
'Return to limit switch left' are active.
Open the dialog for defining the program sequence for this standard
object with a double click and enter the desired settings.
If you are creating a new object, the wizard will guide you through the
first steps. You then assign a suitable object name first and define all
program run functions.
The actual dialog for defining the program run is identical to the
dialog Settings/Program sequence (see subsection Program sequence settings , page 3-49)
8.2.5 Data export
This function is not yet implemented.
8.2.6 Measurement positions
8.2.6.1 Configure measurement position
Click in the left hand working window on the Measurement positions
object type.
All already created measurement positions are displayed in the right
hand window. The standard object always exists. All standard single
objects are assigned to the standard object initially.
Open the object selection dialog with a double click to assign the single objects to this measurement position.
8-4
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Objects
Figure 8-2: Configure measurement positions
This dialog box contains a tab for every object type. This tab contains
all already created objects of this type. Select the object you want to
assign to this measurement position by a mouseclick. The object is selected correctly when its name is displayed correctly in the grey field.
Check all the tabs for the correct assignment of objects to the measurement position.
If you are creating a new Measurement position object, the wizard will
guide you through the first steps. Then you assign a suitable object name
first and assign the single objects.
8.2.6.2 Select measurement position
Select the measurement position command in the Settings menu.
The "Selection Meas. positions" dialog box is opened for selecting one
of the measurement positions previously created in the measurement
position plan. All defined measurement positions are offered.
The selected measurement position is the active measurement position. Changing measuring conditions, parameters and the program
sequence with subsequent saving of the measuring program overwrites the measurement position properties in the changed objects. If
other measurement positions use the same objects as the active
measurement position, the settings also change for these measurement positions.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
8-5
General
9 CNC run (optional)
9.1 General
9.1.1 Activating the CNC editor
The CNC editor provides a function for the programming of a fully
automatic measurement sequence deploying the TURBO WAVE software.
The CNC run is programmed in the Create measuring program
mode. Call the CNC editor with the command of the same name in
the Settings menu.
The CNC editor dialog box is divided into two workspaces:
1. left window: Listing of all possible CNC commands
2. right window: Listing of the created CNC program with the individual
CNC commands in the selected order.
Some CNC commands (e.g. traverse unit reverse, end) characterise
unique runs but other commands (e.g. "Go to step", "Position absolute") are configurable in a subdialog. To do this, click in the right window on the desired command to open the configuration dialog.
Figure 9-1 CNC editor
If the CNC-ON check box is activated, the text addition CNC is shown
on the F5 function key for starting the measuring run. That means the
automatic CNC run starts when you press this function key. If the function is deactivated, F5-Start is re-assigned to a normal measuring run.
Alternatively the measuring run and the CNC measuring run can also
be started in the Edit menu with the commands of the same name.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-1
CNC run (optional)
Important note
If the CNC run is activated, the settings made there for the measuring
conditions and program run have priority over the settings defined in
the measuring program.
9.1.2 Programming the CNC run
Desired result
Action
Insert CNC
command
Click once on the CNC step in the right hand selection window after which a new CNC command is to be inserted.
Then select a new CNC command in the left hand selection
window.
To insert the command marked on the left side at the desired location in the right selection window, use the [Paste >->] button or double click that command.
Delete CNC
command
Select the CNC command in the right hand selection window.
Delete the CNC command from the list with the [Delete
command] button.
Delete
program
Delete the entire CNC program in the right hand selection
window with the [Delete program] button.
Configure
CNC command
Select a CNC command in the right hand selection window
by double clicking. The configuration dialog box opens.
Make the necessary changes, specifications etc. in the subdialog boxes and confirm with [OK].
The settings are displayed partially with the command in the
CNC editor.
9.2 Functional description of the CNC
commands
9.2.1 Run functions
9.2.1.1 Pause
The CNC run waits until you press the Continue key in the CNC status
window.
9.2.1.2 End
The CNC run ends here. This is usually after a condition.
This command may be omitted if it is to be the last command in the
CNC program.
Note:
Normally this command must always be inserted in front of the CNC
command (jump label, beginning of a subroutine)!
9-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Functional description of the CNC commands
9.2.1.3 Go to
Go to a given CNC step
Enter the position number of the CNC step to which the program is to
branch at this position
9.2.1.4 Repetition
One or more CNC steps are repeated n times.
1. Enter the position no. from which all the following CNC steps are to be repeated up to the current position.
2. Enter the number of repetitions (how often this step or run is to be repeated).
➜ The number of total runs = n+1!
9.2.1.5 Signal tone
An acoustic signal sounds ("beep") at this point in the run.
9.2.1.6 Waiting loop
The CNC run is halted for a certain preselected time (seconds).
1. Enter a time in seconds.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-3
CNC run (optional)
The waiting loop can be cancelled prematurely and the CNC run continued with the Continue key in the CNC status window.
9.2.1.7 LabelSub jump label subroutine
This point in the CNC run is marked with a jump label as the start of a
subroutine. This jump label is then used as a jump target (for GoSub).
Note:
This command should always be preceded by the CNC command
'End'!
9.2.1.8 GoSub jump label subroutine
The CNC run jumps to a preselected jump label LabelSub to run a
subroutine at this point.
9.2.1.9 EndSub subroutine
This point in the CNC run is marked as the end of a subroutine.
The beginning of the subroutine must be assigned a jump label (LabelSub) first.
Then the CNC program jumps back to the appropriate GoSub step.
9.2.1.10 GoSub table
The GoSub table command is inserted at the beginning of the CNC
run.
The operator is shown a dialog (table) at runtime in which he can select the measurement positions which need to be measured at the
moment. Every measurement position has been assigned a subroutine
with the commands LabelSub and EndSub beforehand. In this subroutine the measurement position is then selected, the probe positioned
and the measurement made.
9-4
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Configure the CNC command as follows:
Dialog box
topic
Description
Selection
Here you define whether this line is to be shown as selected or deselected when calling the command in the
CNC run.
Checkmark = selected
Select all
All measurement positions are marked selected.
Reset selection
All measurement positions are marked deselected.
Designation
Enter a suitable freely selectable name for the measurement at this measurement position.
LabelSub
Enter the name of the subroutine you want to call for this
measurement position here.
Display options
Define whether and when this dialog box is to be displayed
during the CNC run.
The dialog box is displayed reduced to the columns Selection and
Designation in the CNC run. The user can select the measurement
positions to be measured by clicking the grey boxes.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-5
CNC run (optional)
Example of the structure of the CNC program with this command
CNC
program
Start =>
Call GoSub table =>
=> LabelSub Cyl 01 Rz
•
Select
position
•
Position wavesystem
•
Measure
•
Export QS-Stat
Activate normal window
End
measurement
EndSub
=> LabelSub Cyl 02 Rz
•
Select
position
•
Position wavesystem
•
Measure
•
Export QS-Stat
measurement
EndSub
9.2.1.11 TRY/Catch/ End_Catch
This group of commands can be used to define a running order including error handling in the measured value recording (e.g. edge recognition as a forerunner to further measurements).
This command may be followed by:
TRY
•
Measuring START
•
Topography START
If an error occurs when executing this command, the program jumps
to CATCH. The routine for the event of an error then begins (CATCH
block).
The jump in target for the error in TRY is marked with CATCH. This
may be an error message for example.
CATCH
The end of the CATCH block is marked by END_CATCH.
END_CATCH
9-6
Then the normal run is resumed.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Example:
TRY
TRY
Command 1
Fault case
Command 2
Command 3
CATCH
CATCH
Command 4
Normal run
Command 5
END_CATCH
END_CATCH
Command 6
Command 7
Run normal:
1,2,3,6,7,...
Run with error:
1,2 (error), 4,5,6,7,...
9.2.2 Positioning
9.2.2.1 LV (linear traverse unit) reverse
The linear traverse unit (LV) traverses backwards into its agreed home
position. This is given by the respective settings in the program run
(reverse functions).
9.2.2.2 Position absolute
Position an axis (device) to an absolute position regarding the zero
point with specification of the positioning speed.
Select the axis to be positioned (measuring station component) and
enter a positioning speed as well as the absolute position to be moved
to.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-7
CNC run (optional)
Probe monitor ON:
If the probe is overmodulated (overpressed), the axis movement stops
automatically.
Positioning controlled:
The required position is driven to exactly when the function is activated
(otherwise only roughly). This function negates the "fast positioning"
function if this is switched on in the Properties dialog box of the wavesystem axes.
9.2.2.3 Position relative
Position an axis (device) to a relative position regarding the momentary position with specification of the positioning speed.
Select the axis to be positioned (measuring station component) and
enter a positioning speed and the positioning path (relative distance
from momentary position).
Probe monitor ON:
If the probe is overmodulated (overpressed), the axis movement stops
automatically.
Positioning controlled:
The required position is driven to exactly when the function is activated
(otherwise only roughly). This function negates the "fast positioning"
function if this is switched on in the Properties dialog box of the wavesystem axes.
9-8
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
9.2.2.4 Auto Stop
Position an axis (device) until the probe has reached a given probe
value.
Select the axis and enter the necessary values in the bottom section
Position = probe position to be moved to
Max. pos. length:
The value input is direction-dependent! (top/bottom, right/left)
Important!!
Note sign!!
Negative => axis traverses down/left
Positive => axis traverses up/right
9.2.2.5 Lift/lower stylus
Lift or lower stylus in probes with lifting function (special probe TKA...)
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-9
CNC run (optional)
9.2.2.6 ADPS
This command enables automatic searching and detection of an edge
and positioning to this edge.
2
V
1
5
[µm]
4
6
3
Fig. 9-2: Principle diagram ADPS
Pos.
Description
1
Probe position (on the workpiece)
2
Direction of movement of linear traverse unit (direction of measurement)
3
preceding window
4
following window
5
Workpiece edge
6
Slope difference when the probe drops at the edge in [µm]
= vertical distance between the two mid-points of the preceding and
following windows
As long as an edge exists, the slope difference is smaller than the
tolerance (= specified slope difference in the ADPS dialog box)
9-10
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Enter the data in the dialog box for this command as follows:
Pos.
Description
Positioning speed
Positioning speed for the linear traverse unit during this
edge detection or positioning.
[mm/s]
Slope difference
[µm]
= vertical distance between the two mid-points of the
preceding and following window
At this value the edge is detected as such and the axis
stops.
Note sign!!
(+) = rising edge
(-) = falling edge
Wide preceding
window
Input of task adapted
[mm]
Wide following
window
Input of task adapted
[mm]
Max. pos. length
[mm]
The CNC program is exited at the latest at the end of
this distance.
Then check the causes and move the axes to safe areas!
9.2.3 Align, Adjustment
9.2.3.1 Activate adjustment window
The adjustment window is called.
The CNC program is interrupted with a subsequent "Pause" command
and the axes can be operated manually (for settings etc.).
9.2.3.2 Show alignment value
In the CNC run the value determined for rough alignment (manual or
automatic) in the adjustment measuring run is displayed at this point.
9.2.3.3 Rough alignment
An adjustment measuring run for rough alignment is performed at this
point and the tilt unit is aligned (manually or automatically). Enter the
length of the traverse for the adjustment measuring run:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-11
CNC run (optional)
9.2.4 Measuring conditions, measurement, evaluation
9.2.4.1 Start measurement
The command starts a measured value recording on the basis of the
general settings (measuring conditions, LV reverse etc.)
9.2.4.2 Activate measurement window
The measurement window is called and a measurement is started (as
for command "Start measurement").
9.2.4.3 Set measuring conditions
The command enables you to change the set measuring conditions
during the CNC run. The "Measuring conditions" dialog box is opened
for this.
The new measuring conditions apply until they are changed (e.g. with
a CNC step).
Note
The changed measuring conditions apply for the whole measuring program (even outside of CNC operation)!
9.2.4.4 Tolerance test LB_Pz
The command only works with the parameter LB_Pz (special parameter for evaluation of conductors).
The program tests the tolerance deviation of that parameter at this position of the CNC sequence, and it will branch to a preset CNC step, if
the default tolerance value set is exceeded.
9-12
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Enter an upper and lower tolerance for that parameter and specify the
program step to which the program will branch, when the tolerance
deviates
9.2.4.5 Probe force / measurement direction
Probe force, probing direction and measuring direction can be reversed in the CNC run at this point. Select the appropriate function:
9.2.4.6 Select measuring station
This CNC step determines for which measuring station the following
CNC commands are to apply:
All the measuring stations set up in the setup menu are available for
selection.
9.2.4.7 Select measurement position
This CNC step determines which measurement position is to be activated for the CNC run. The following CNC commands should apply:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-13
CNC run (optional)
All the measurement positions set up in the measurement position
manager are available for selection.
9.2.4.8 Extract
The extraction takes place at this point in the CNC run according to
the settings in the measuring program. Therefore define the criteria for
extracting profile segments first in the Settings/Program sequence
dialog box Extract tab.
9.2.4.9 Align profile
This command carries out a profile alignment according to the previously defined settings.
Select the desired type of alignment.
Enter the limits of the alignment intervals for the Partial align option
in [mm].
9-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
9.2.4.10 Activate normal window
The CNC program returns to the "normal window" (= screen form).
Settings can be changed manually in the screen form and the measuring result can be observed.
The Pause command must be inserted after this command to do this
otherwise the CNC program continues with the next step immediately!
9.2.4.11 Change measuring program
The current measuring program and the corresponding CNC program
are exited with this CNC step. Then a new measuring program and
CNC program are started automatically.
The new measuring program then uses the settings for parameter file,
company header and measuring documentation defined for this command in the CNC editor:
9.2.5 Display, outputs/exports, save
9.2.5.1 Message window
This command shows any message for the operator which he has to
confirm.
The message is configured in the CNC editor as follows:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-15
CNC run (optional)
Enter any message text.
The following confirmations (style) can be agreed for the message:
1. "OK" => acknowledge function
2. "Yes/No" => the CNC run branches to a specified yes or no step number.
(0=no branching)
9.2.5.2 Print (print report)
This CNC step starts printing the print report.
9.2.5.3 Assign parameter file
The command allows you to change the parameter file (filename, file
save path) during the CNC run.
Configure the editing scope for the operator in the CNC editor as follows:
9-16
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Select the name and file save path for the parameter file to be saved
(change directory with [Change])
Select an option for the possible editing of these entries during the
CNC run (option 1,2 or 3).
"only" function:
When the function is activated, option 3 is deactivated and the editing
scope is restricted.
"change at start of the CNC sequence" function:
The input dialog box is opened at the start of the CNC run before the
first CNC step.
"Load last profile" function:
The profile last saved in the newly selected parameter file is loaded
and displayed on the screen.
9.2.5.4 Change measuring documentation
The command allows you to change the measuring documentation
during the CNC run.
Configure the editing options for the operator in the CNC editor as follows:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-17
CNC run (optional)
Select from the options in the bottom part of this dialog box whether
and when the dialog box is to be shown and what settings are to be
transferred to the measuring documentation.
The operator can edit the entries in the CNC run.
If the "do not show" option is selected. the entries can only be edited in
the CNC editor!
9.2.5.5 Change company header
Regardless of the settings in the measuring program, a second company header can be designed here. Enter the appropriate data. Determine whether and when the company header in the CNC measuring
run is to be displayed for editing the entries:
9-18
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Select whether and when the dialog box is to be displayed in the bottom section of this dialog box.
The operator can edit the entries in the CNC run.
If you select the "do not show" option, the entries can only be edited
here in the CNC editor!
9.2.5.6 Delete measurement
With this CNC step the measuring results and the profiles are deleted
according to the selected settings. By selecting the suitable option, the
deletion of profiles can be defined related to the measurement position
(active or all).
9.2.5.7 Export QS-STAT
In the CNC run the statistics data are exported in QS-STAT format at
this point.
Optionally the dialog box for the QS-STAT export in the CNC run can
be displayed to adapt the settings again. To do so, activate this function:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-19
CNC run (optional)
9.2.5.8 Check inputs / outputs
With this CNC command the settings of inputs and outputs are
checked during the CNC run.
Examples:
•
Signal transmission software to signal LED array or lamps
•
Signal transmission software to peripheral devices
•
Signal transmission from wavesystem keyboard (measuring program selection) to software
Define these settings as follows:
9-20
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Dialog box
topic
Description
Set outputs
The outputs are switched on or off according to the
switches set in this dialog.
Link with output port
The current output or the set switch (from dialog box) are
set.
Example:
active outputs:
set switch:
end state
Read in inputs
1001 OR
0010
1001 (linked)
It is checked whether the set bits are active.
Example 1:
inputs:
set switch:
Result:
set
1010 AND
1000
1000 = set switch => required inputs are all
Example 2:
inputs:
set switch:
Result:
not set
Inputs set/not
set - step no.
1010 AND
1100
1000 ≠ set switch => required inputs are
Determine for the inputs which step is to be branched to
depending on the result of the test.
Hexadecimal representation of the current bit pattern
(separately for inputs and outputs)
9.2.5.9 Multiprint
With this command, the Multiprint function in the CNC run is switched
on or off at this point. Select the appropriate function:
9.2.6 Topography, contour
9.2.6.1 Topography settings
With this command the Topography option in the measuring program
is switched on and the Topography settings dialog box for editing the
topography settings is shown during the CNC run.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-21
CNC run (optional)
You will find more information about this dialog box in subsection
Settings, page 7-1!
9.2.6.2 Start topography measurement
A topography measuring run is started with this command.
First the topography option must be switched on in the measuring program! Use the Topography settings command for this and activate the
"Topography ON" function there in the dialog box. Also check the
other settings in the dialog box and adapt these as necessary.
9.2.6.3 Start profile evaluation with contour software
The separate TURBO CONTOUR software is started for contour
evaluation.
The settings for this are defined in the dialog box Profile=>TURBO
CONTOUR in the CNC editor. (You will find detailed information about
the dialog box in subsection Profile export to TURBO CONTOUR,
page 3-60)
9.2.6.4 Position detection
This command performs position detection of the workpiece using the
Z axis.
This function can be used for checking whether the workpiece is inserted correctly for example. The Z axis (wavelift) drives to the given Z
position and then the probe signal tolerance is checked.
9-22
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Determining zero offset
1. Enter the Z position and a tolerance for this position in the dialog box.
2. Determine which program step is to be branched to depending on the result of the tolerance test.
Definition of the nominal position:
Nominal position: probe value = within the tolerance
On not reaching nominal position: probe value = outside the tolerance
9.3 Determining zero offset
9.3.1 General
To guarantee exact absolute positioning of the axes in CNC operation,
the probe position has to be checked (X/Z co-ordinates) in the following cases:
¾ First-time operation of measuring station
¾ Probe change
¾ Disassembly/assembly linear traverse unit
After this check the current probe co-ordinates at the inspection point
are compared with master values. If the newly determined probe position deviates from the master co-ordinates, an axis offset (zero offset)
must be entered in the TURBO WAVE software. (You will find further
information about this in subsection Measuring station configuration,
page 2-1!).
An inspection point is used which is fixed to the workpiece unchangeably.
Reference point
Select a suitable location on your fixture for this reference marking
(e.g. normal recording) and make permanent marks in X and Y direction.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-23
CNC run (optional)
9.3.2 Determining master co-ordinates
Proceed as follows to determine the master co-ordinates:
1. Place the holder with the marker underneath the appropriate measuring station or probe.
2. Start the TURBO WAVE software and open the appropriate measuring
program.
3. Change to the evaluation window using F6. Position the probe roughly
above the Y marker of the inspection point by traversing the measuring
column manually until the probe signal is equal zero.
4. Check the Y position of the probe and also correct on the probe
fastening manually if necessary.
5. Move the waveline feed (X-axis) with the cursor keys slowly to the
right. When the probe has reached the marker, release the cursor key
to stop the movement.
6. Read the current axis positions (X/Z co-ordinates) for the inspection
point in the adjustment menu. Exit the adjustment window with F12.
Important!
7. The master co-ordinates of the inspection point must be marked well
visibly and permanently on the fixture!
9.3.3 Checking the probe position/Determining the
zero offset
Attention!
Before every probe position check the current zero offset values for the
axes being tested must be deactivated in the Setup dialog box!
Change to the Setup dialog box of every axis and deactivate the respective function "Zero offset" (see subsection Measuring station configuration, page 2-1!)
Check work steps probe position:
1. Position the holder with the inspection point marker underneath the
probe.
2. Open the appropriate measuring program in TURBO WAVE.
3. Change to the evaluation window using F6. Position the probe roughly
above the Y marker of the inspection point by traversing the measuring
column manually until the probe signal is equal zero.
4. Check the Y position of the probe and also correct on the probe fastening manually if necessary.
5. Move the waveline traverse unit (X-axis) with the cursor keys slowly to
the right. When the probe has reached the marker, release the cursor
key to stop the movement.
6. Read the current axis position (X/Z co-ordinates) for the inspection
point in the adjustment menu and note down the values. Exit the adjustment window with F12.
7. Then compare the determined X/Y co-ordinates with the master coordinates marked on the fixture.
If no differences are determined, you can now change to the normal
CNC measuring operation.
9-24
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Determining zero offset
Proceed as follows in the case of deviations:
8. Open the Setup dialog box in the TURBO WAVE main menu with
function key F8.
9. Go to the Measuring station configuration tab and select the measuring station for which you are doing the check.
10. Select the axis for which you want to enter a zero point offset value in
the right window (waveline, wavelift...).
11. Open the Properties dialog box of this axis:
12. Activate the "Zero offset CNC operation" check box with a mouseclick
and enter the determined difference from the master value in the text
box below it (see figure: here for Z axis=measuring column). Confirm
with OK.
13. Proceed in the same way for the other axes if an offset value is to be
entered there.
9.3.4 Special commands
9.3.4.1 Read in control file
This command belongs to the DEGUSSA special project.
The command reads a control file with the extension *.csv until reaching the last line or until reaching the keyword END. Then the company
header, name of the parameter file and the "Offset waveline" value for
the topography are read in from every line.
Depending on the result of the control line MOD a subroutine is called
according to the entries in the dialog box (goto a specified jump label).
The command is ended as soon as other control lines are available for
processing.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
9-25
CNC run (optional)
9-26
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Description of compensation
10 Compensation and calibration
10.1Description of compensation
10.1.1 General
Probes are used for precision measurement of workpiece geometries
which need to meet a wide variety of requirements. Workpiece position, workpiece nature and processing direction determine the selection of the probe and the necessary geometry.
Contours in pipes, for example, must be measured with long probe
arms just a few millimetres high. Long stylus tips must be used for
deep lying structures to measure the bottom of a groove or a pot. The
radius of the stylus tip may be between 1µm to 1mm and more depending on the application.
The nature and position of the workpiece contour, a non-linearity of
the probe signal, the radius of the stylus tip and its circular movement
as well as an unequal amplification of the probe signal in different
measuring ranges lead to physically related profile distortions which
need to be compensated or linearised.
The adjustment method described in this chapter is suitable for all
standard probes of the Hommelwerke GmbH.
The following error sources can be picked up and compensated by the
software:
1. Probe sensitivity
2. Arc movement of the probe arm
3. Stylus tip height
4. Linearity of the probe signal
5. Stylus tip radius
6. Measuring range switching
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-1
Compensation and calibration
10.1.2 Definition of terms on the probe
Stylus tip position
90°
probe arm length
traverse unit
axis or X axis
probe housing with
probe arm bearing
probe tip
angle
probe arm
radius
probing depth
probe tip height
probe tip
position
probe tip
radius
Stylus tip position
75°
probe arm length
probe housing with
probe arm bearing
traverse unit
axis or X axis
probing depth
probe tip
angle
probe arm
radius
probe tip height
probe tip position
probe tip radius
10-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
10.1.3 Arc error
When the stylus tip is moved on an arc, the profile becomes distorted
(e.g. in sphere measurement).
profile without
arc error compensation
workpiece surface
(profile with compensation)
probing direction
electrical zero
Figure 10-1: Schematic: arc error compensation
The advance of the stylus tip ∆X depends on the probe arm length
and the momentary stroke (selected measuring range).
∆X = Probe arm radius − Probe arm radius 2 − Stroke 2
Probe arm radius = distance between probe arm bearing and stylus tip
The geometric data of the probe and the stylus tip height are used for
arc error compensation. The arc error is automatically compensated in
the measuring run. To do this, the arc error compensation must be activated in the measuring program under Measuring conditions in the
probe tab.
10.1.4 Stylus tip radius
A radius on the stylus tip is physically necessary so that the tracing
needle does not wear too quickly and does not catch on or damage
the surface.
However, the stylus tip radius distorts the profile. This error occurs
particularly on steep edges (>45°).
The stylus tip error is automatically compensated in the measuring
run. To do this the radius compensation must be activated in the
measuring program under Measuring conditions in the probe tab.
10.1.4.1 Scanning of arcs
Concave scanned arcs are reduced by the stylus tip radius, convex
scanned arcs are enlarged.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-3
The distortion of the arc depends on the ratio of the stylus tip radius to
the arc radius.
1
Stylus tip
2
Recorded profile without radius compensation (dotted line =
course of the radius centre point of the stylus tip)
3
Workpiece surface = compensated profile
10.1.4.2 Scanning of straight lines
Straight lines are shifted in parallel with the stylus tip radius. Falling
straight lines are shifted in the direction of scanning, rising straight
lines in the opposite direction.
The size of the shift depends on the stylus tip radius and the rise of
the straight line.
10-4
1
Stylus tip
2
Recorded profile without radius compensation (dotted line =
course of the radius centre point of the stylus tip)
3
Workpiece surface = compensated profile
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
10.1.5 Probe sensitivity (gain factor)
The inductive coil system in the probe results in an uneven gain of the
probe signal in different measuring ranges. It must therefore be balanced on-site with the aid of setting masters (gauge blocks).
Calibration with a gauge block leads to determination of a gain factor
and must be performed separately with every new probe and for every
measuring range in which measurements are to be taken (measuring
range switching). For this, the probe signal must be determined with
and without the relevant gauge block.
10.1.6 Stylus tip height
If the electrical and mechanical zero positions do not match, an error
results which produces the same effect as the arc error and causes
the electrical zero to be shifted. Possible causes are as follows:
•
incorrectly set scanning needle height
•
tolerances in the manufacture of the probe arm and the probe arm holder
•
probes which have a pre-defined stylus tip height
The difference (Z-distance between probe arm bearing and stylus tip)
is designated the stylus tip height. It is determined in the calibration
run by comparing the actual profile values of a scanned calibrating
mandrel (sphere, radius standard) with the arithmetic values.
The stylus tip height is assigned to the probe arm with which the calibration run is performed. It is automatically saved (entry under Measuring conditions in the "probe arm" data dialog) and is taken into account in the compensation of the arc error.
The stylus tip height must always be calculated whenever a new probe
arm is used. Calibration is also important after the stylus tip has been
changed, however.
Note on
application
10.1.7 Probe signal linearisation
The linearity error of the probe signal is compensated during the profile measurement to increase the measuring accuracy by correcting
the AD converter values automatically after the measuring run using a
linear correction file. Normally this is only necessary for contour
probes. If, however, profiles of roughness probes are used for contour
evaluation, a linear correction may have to be made.
This linearity error is determined specially by HOMMELWERKE for the
delivered probe. The linearisation data are saved in several files and
are saved on the PC's hard disk or on the disk delivered with the
probe.
The correction files automatically carry the serial number of the probe
in the filename. When using different probe arms with the same probe
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-5
this filename must be extended appropriately for every probe arm because every combination needs to have its own linearisation.
If no linearisation file has been saved on the hard disk yet for the
probe selected for the measurement task, you can install this from the
disk provided (file *.lnk).
You must do this in any case when no own adjustment is possible and
a measurement with aligned probe is prescribed. Only measurements
with limited linearity are possible without alignment.
10.1.7.2 Install linear correction file
The probe to linear correction file allocation is made in the Setup dialog box, "probe" tab (see also subsection Linear correction file, page
2-17).
Figure 10-2: Configure probe data
Choose the probe type from the "Type" column and the specific probe
from the "Serial number" column and confirm by clicking on the [Linear
correction file] button.
10-6
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
If no linear correction file has been saved yet for the selected probe,
you have to install this from the disk provided now (press the [Install...]
button). The file name is the serial number of the probe.
If the linearity correction file belonging to the selected probe is already
on the hard disk, correction values are displayed in the "Contents"
window. If they are all "0" the linear correction file must be installed
from disk.
See the following table!
Function
Description
Install...
Insert the disk for the probe in drive A:\.
The software automatically searches for the linearity
correction file belonging to the serial number.
The file is installed automatically in the TURBO
WAVE program folder.
Enter/Change
The correction values in the "Contents" column are
cleared for editing.
Delete content
The correction values in the "Contents" column are
all set to zero.
It is only necessary to enter or change individual correction values in a
few special cases and this should therefore be done by Hommelwerke
service personnel!
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
Attention
10-7
10.2Calibrate the scanning system
10.2.1 Introduction
The following standards are used for calibrating the scanning systems:
Calibration standard
Application
Gauge blocks
Determination of probe sensitivity
Result: Gain factor
Calibration sphere
Determination of the stylus tip height
Radius standard
Angled optical flat
or appropriate flat surface (ceramic block)
Determination of the linearisation data for the
probe
Technical data of standard probes as well as the allocation of the
gauge blocks can be found as a PDF file on the software CD.
Note
The following descriptions of the calibration procedures on the probe
have been compiled using a TKU300 with standard probe arm TS1 in the
Measuring conditions Roughness mode.
10.2.2 Preparation of the measuring system
10.2.2.1 Ambient conditions
Note
The measuring system must be switched on for at least half an hour before every calibration procedure (probe must be connected to power) to
warm up to the operating temperature necessary for accurate measurements!
Avoid vibrations, direct exposure to sunlight and strong air currents.
The measuring station must be kept very clean. The stylus tip and
calibration standards must be checked for damage and contamination.
Clean the standards and the stylus tip with the following cleaning
agents if necessary:
•
Acetone or isopropyl alcohol in connection with a cotton wool bud on wood
(not plastic because of the danger of dissolving)
•
Lint free cleaning paper (e.g. precision wipes made by Kimberly-Clark)
•
Cleaning tack RODIKO for removing small particles left on the standard or
stylus tip without leaving residue
10.2.2.2 Necessary accessories
•
Probe data
•
Calibration standards
Technical data of the standard probes and the allocation of the gauge
blocks can be found as a PDF file on the software CD.
10-8
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Calibrate the scanning system
All settings in the measuring conditions are deactivated in the calibration process.
10.2.2.3 Aligning the scanning system
The optical flat (measurement basis) and probe must be aligned to the
linear traverse unit in all axes. Twist-proof probe holders and mounts
fitted with flats simply correct alignment.
1. Align the probe on the traverse unit:
The probe must always be vertical to the scanning direction!
probe skew and
twisted
probe twisted
probe position correct
2. Align linear traverse unit or optical flat/ceramic block:
Regardless of whether the probe is mounted on the quill or the probe
adapter of the traverse unit, a measurement must be made first for the
horizontal alignment (X axis) on the optical flat or ceramic block with
the following measuring conditions.
Measuring conditions:
Traverse length Lt = 10 - 20 mm
Traverse speed Vt = 0.2 to 1 mm/s
Measuring range: small
Vertical representation in report Vv = 0.5 µm
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-9
Minimum angle and alignment errors are easy to recognise (see the
following graphics).
Material side
Optical flat rising or traverse
unit falling
Material side
Material side
Optical flat falling or traverse unit rising
Optical flat parallel to the
traverse unit
The traverse unit is aligned manually by the tilt unit or motorised with
the 'Rough align' software function.
10.2.3 Preparations in TURBO WAVE
10.2.3.1 probe definition in the Setup menu
A new probe must be added to the probe list of the TURBO WAVE
software first.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Setup menu with F8.
2. Go to the probe tab.
3. Click on the desired probe type in the left column.
4. Click on the [Add probe] button and enter the serial number of your probe
in the dialog box that then appears.
Note
If you also want to read in linearisation data from the disk provided, the
serial numbers must match the filenames on the disk exactly. Only then
can the data be assigned clearly!
Example:
The linearisation files on the disk are called 79079.xxx. In this case the
probe must also be given the serial number 79079 in the Setup menu.
5. Click the [Add probe arm] button and enter a suitable name for the probe
arm in the next dialog box and add the probe arm data
The term definition of the probe arm data can be found in subsection
Definition of terms on the probe, page 10-2.
10-10
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
The result on the Setup menu then looks like this for example:
You will find detailed information about this in the chapter Setup menu.
Then check in the Measuring station configuration tab under waveline,
that the 'Measuring signal from probe adapter' function is deactivated
when the probe is connected on the quill. Otherwise the pick up moves
on collision course because no probe signal is available.
Attention!
If a probe adapter is available the probe can also be calibrated through
this interface. Then this function must be activated.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-11
10.2.3.2 Enter measuring conditions
Any measuring program can be used for calibrating the scanning system.
Attention!
Make sure that the mode for the measuring conditions suitable for the
probe or measurement task (roughness and/or contour) is set so that the
necessary measuring and evaluation conditions are available!
1. First select the Roughness measuring conditions mode in the Options
menu.
2. Call the Measuring conditions dialog box in the Settings menu in the
measuring program..
3. First go to the probe tab.
Fig. 10-3: probe settings for calibration
Dialog
topic
Entry in example
Description
Probe
type
TKU300/ Ts1
Select the probe to be calibrated from the list.
All the probes created in the Setup menu are
available.
Note: The calibrated probes are right at the
end of the list!
Measuring range
400 µm
The smallest possible measuring range must
always be selected which can cover the
whole nominal probe stroke.
Example: probe stroke TKU300 = ±300 µm
=> next selectable measuring range =
400 µm
10-12
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Dialog
topic
Deactivate
Entry in example
Description
compensations
All compensations can stay off during calibration because they are insignificant for the calibration process.
You can have another look at the probe data entered in the Setup
menu with the [probe data...] button.
Then go to the tab for the general measuring conditions (here only
roughness).
in the example: tab ISO settings
Enter the measuring conditions (example: for TKU300/Ts1) as follows:
Dialog box
topic
Entry in
example
Description
traverse
length Lt
10 mm
Here you can enter a measuring distance as
required.
Filter
ISO 11562
Lc
0.8 mm
The filter settings are not really significant for
the calibration.
However, you do have to select a filter suitable
for the traverse length so that the measurement can be started without an error message!
Filter Lc/Ls
REJ
This setting leads to a clearer profile for the calibration process.
Traverse
speed Vt
0.5 mm/s
Select the traverse speed here.
0.2 to 1 mm/s is normal.
Note: Low speeds mean fewer basic disturbances!
No. of measured
values
10000
The selected traverse length Lt and the horizontal measured value distance automatically give
the corresponding number of measuring points.
=> 4000 to 10000 measured values are sufficient
Deactivate
Remove
form
Remove form is not necessary and undesirable
in the calibration.
10.2.3.3 Set the program sequence
Call the Program sequence dialog box in the measuring program
with the Settings menu.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-13
Check the following settings in the different tabs:
Tab
Function
Setting
Settings
Return trav. after measuring run
REJ
Settings
All other general run functions
deactivated
Align
Do not align
active
Contour
Evaluation after measuring run
none
10.2.3.4 Call adjustment window
Now go to the Adjustment window with F6. A successfully completed
reference run is the prerequisite for calibration.
If no reference run has been performed since system start you have to
start this now in the menu. See the notes on the reference run in subsection Automatic reference run, page 4-9
Then perform the calibrations:
1. Determination of gain factor (probe sensitivity)
2. Determination of stylus tip height
3. Linearisation of the probe signal
The description of the calibration processed for the example probe can
be found in the following subsections.
10.2.4 Determination of gain factor
10.2.4.1 Calibration run
The gauge block calibration is performed below with the TKU300
probe in the measuring range ±400 µm as an example.
The procedure for other probes and measuring ranges is the same.
Notes
The measuring range ± 800 µm is only selectable in the software for reasons of compatibility. This enables you to continue or extend older data
records/profiles created with this measuring range with current measurements. The measuring range ± 400 µm is to be preferred for new
measurements because of the higher resolution of 0.05 µm.
wavecontour analogue:
Also perform the calibration in the other (smaller) measuring ranges with
the corresponding (small) gauge blocks otherwise errors may occur in
the measuring results.
Presets:
Change to the evaluation window using F6.
In the example, the waveline traverse unit is at position 0 (X axis) after
the reference run.
10-14
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Start the calibration wizard:
1. Press Shift+F6 to move the zero adjuster to the mid position.
2. Start the calibration wizard by clicking the button opposite (or with
Shift+F10). Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Select the measuring range you want to calibrate (in the example:
400 µm). The smallest possible measuring range which still covers the full
nominal probe stroke should always be selected in the initial calibration.
Automatic probe arm control (in wavecontour):
The probe arm is automatically lifted and lowered back before the measuring column moves and to remove the gauge block. (already activated as a
default)
4. Apply the gauge block belonging to the selected measuring range properly
to the ceramic block and position it under the stylus tip.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-15
5. In this step the measuring column is positioned so that the probe value
suggested by the software is reached.
Press the [Auto] to do this. The column first goes to zero and then back to
the set value.
When you click on the [Continue] button the first probe value is automatically determined (with the gauge block) .
6. Move the ceramic block with the gauge block carefully aside (away from
the probe)! Lower the probe arm carefully onto the ceramic block next to
the gauge block.
Attention!
10-16
TK probes may not be lifted by hand because this could damage them!
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
wavecontour with automatic probe arm control: The probe arm is lowered
automatically.
After pressing the [Continue] button the second probe value (without
gauge block) is determined.
7. When the calibration measuring run is successfully completed the calculated gain factor is displayed:
If you want to check the calculated gain factor you are guided automatically through steps 3 and 5 to 7 again.
8. You can exit the wizard if calibration was successful.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-17
If calibration was unsuccessful you have to find out why (wrong gauge
block, soiled or incorrectly placed gauge block) and start a new calibration
run.
9. Free the probe and remove the ceramic block and gauge block from the
measuring station.
10.2.5 Determination of the stylus tip height
Use the sphere or radius standard belonging to the probe. Presets:
Change to the evaluation window using F6.
1. Move the waveline linear traverse unit to a position of about 10 mm (X
axis) to guarantee an adequate measuring distance.
2. Place the calibrating sphere in the holder (supplied with the calibration set)
and position it below the probe or stylus tip.
Start the calibration wizard:
1. Start the calibration wizard by clicking on the button opposite. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
10-18
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Check that the axis path is clear and the probe is not contacting at any
point.
2. Enter the radius of your calibrating sphere in [mm] in the input box (actual
value). You will find this figure on the calibration document supplied with
the calibration set.
Click on [Continue].
Regardless of its current position, the linear traverse unit is moved to a
preset starting position. With automatic probe arm control (e.g. wavecontour) the probe arm is lifted automatically.
The whole positioning path on the sphere may not be obstructed by limit
switches or other limitations. Check the entries in the settings of the
waveline device beforehand if necessary!
Attention!
3. The stylus tip must then be positioned at the highest point on the sphere:
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-19
First lower the probe arm. Move the measuring column if necessary until
the stylus tip rests on the sphere.
Then align the X/Y measuring table underneath the scanning system by
rotating the micrometer screws until the stylus tip is located on the zenith
of the sphere (reverse point in X and Y direction).
To do so, track the absolute value display for the probe position on the left
in the adjustment window.
Make sure especially that the alignment in Z direction is precise!
4. The measuring column automatically moves to a preset value.
5. The linear traverse unit first moves back (from the zenith of the sphere) a
certain distance depending on the specified radius (in some cases also
dependent on the stylus tip angle and position) and then scans the calibrating sphere over the whole diameter.
10-20
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
6. When the calibrating measuring run is complete the resultant stylus tip
height is displayed:
On exiting the wizard with the [Finish] button, the stylus tip height is saved
and entered in the probe arm data.
7. Free the probe and remove the calibrating sphere from the measuring station.
10.2.6 Probe linearisation
The linearity correction files for the probe are determined by an optical
flat ramp. The ramp must have a defined gradient so that a given
height difference (calibration limit) can be moved within the traverse
length Lt.
In the example the following specification apply:
Traverse length: 10 mm
Calibration limits ± 250 µm
Implementation of the ramp gradient by 4 mm gauge block
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
10-21
Work steps:
1. Move the waveline device to the start position=0.0 mm.
2. Place a ceramic block (or optical flat) under the stylus tip. Tilt the block by
placing the gauge block under the rest as shown in the figure left.
3. Move the measuring column to a probe signal of approx. +300 µm.
4. Press the three keys Shift + CTRL + INS simultaneously to open the input
dialog box for the calibration limits.
Enter the example values.
Then press [START].
5. The probe traverses the specified length automatically. The calibration limits (height difference Z) must be reached within this length.
6. The error message "Check calibration limits" is output if the calibration limits are not reached. Then check the entries in the dialog box and the adequate gradient of the ramp. Repeat all work steps for this.
7. The probe-specific linearisation files are saved in various files on the hard
disk and automatically entered in the probe data dialog box.
When calibration by the ramp has been successfully completed, the
probe is fully calibrated to the selected measuring range. The necessary correction data were saved on hard disk or entered in the software.
Note
10-22
For measurements in other measuring ranges only the gauge block calibration (determination of gain factor) needs to be performed again with
the appropriate gauge blocks.
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Introduction to scanning systems
11 Roughness measuring
11.1Introduction to scanning systems
In practice, each surface must fulfil a certain function. This can be
of minor importance, like the external surface of an engine block. It
can also have a decisive effect on the service life of a unit – bearings,
for example.
In such cases, the quality of the surface must be defined as exactly as
possible, so that its function can be optimally fulfilled.
In production, each modification of machine or tool settings, or of the
tool condition (wear), automatically implies a modification of the surface to be processed.
By measuring the surface on the finished workpiece, the production
process is monitored continuously, permitting intervention before production tolerances are exceeded.
Certain ranges of roughness can be achieved depending on the
type of production procedure. The roughness quantities were
standardised using surface measurement quantities according to DIN /
ISO so that they could be measured and compared.
11.1.1 Probe principle
protective tube
housing
measuring coils
Attachment plug
0.8-30.0
Skid
Bearing
Labeling
Probe
element
Probe tip
Ferrite
plates
Figure 11-1: Probe principle
The mechanical scanning of the surface in the HOMMEL TESTER is
based on the principle of an inductive distance sensor system.
In this system, a diamond stylus is moved over the surface to be
measured.
The stylus is mounted on a probe arm which pivots perpendicular to
the tracing level.
There are two ferrite plates on the upper side of the probe arm. When
the probe is in its neutral position, the distance between these plates
and the two coils arranged in the probe housing is exactly defined. A
sinus-wave carrier voltage is applied to these coils. Each deflection of
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
11-1
Roughness measuring
the stylus due to its movement over the rough surface causes a
change in the inductance of the coils.
The voltage changes are evaluated by the probe electronics, transformed into a signal proportional to the deflection, and displayed and
logged as a surface dimension.
11.1.2 Probe identification
Labelling scheme on the probe:
HOMMELWERKE TKE100/17
-100 5 90° 0.8 -30.0/1.95 0.0/0.0
1 2 3
4
5
6
Top line:
Hommelwerke product designation (classification and form)
Bottom line: labelling according to DIN 4772
Position
Description
1
Measuring lift [µm]
2
Stylus radius [µm]
3
Stylus angle [degree]
4
Measuring force [mN]
5
Skid radius long/perpendicular [mm]
6
Skid spacing to stylus long/perpendicular [mm]
The identification according to DIN 4772 is attached as a label to the
probe (see Probe principle , Figure 11-1).
The technical specification of the Hommelwerke product designation
guides in the selection of probe type can be found in the current list of
probes.
11.1.3 Overview of scanning systems
The scanning systems are divided into single skid, double skid, and
reference plane probes.
11-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Definitions of surface roughness
Single skid systems are for measuring level surfaces, shafts, and holes
Double-skid systems are for measuring curved surfaces such as plates
and rollers (standardised according
to SEP 1940)
Reference plane scanning systems
are for measuring waviness and form
deviation without corruption using
skids
11.2Definitions of surface roughness
11.2.1 Surface profile element
Geometric interpretation according to DIN EN ISO 4287:
A profile element as part of the profile consists of a profile peak and a
profile valley. It is made up of the height Zp of the profile peak, the
depth Zv of the profile valley, and the profile spacing Xs.
The height difference Zt is the difference between the height of the
peak and the depth of the valley of one profile element.
The quotient dZ(x)/dX is the local slope on one section of profile.
As a material length Ml (c)i the material section of the profile element in
a defined cutting height c is designated.
11.2.2 Definitions on roughness profile
The roughness profile is created by separating the long-wave profile
elements with the profile filter λc.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
11-3
Roughness measuring
Element
Designation
Description
λc
Cut off
λc characterises the filter used to separate the
waviness from roughness profile.
Traverse
length
total length of probe movement during the surface tracing process.
(=lr)
lt
(>ln)
Lt contains the sampling length ln as well as
a start-up length and overtravel to be able to
form the roughness profile with the profile filter.
ln
(5xlr)
Traverse
length
evaluation length (traverse length minus startup length and overtravel)
Ln contains several single sampling lengths lr.
lr
(=λc)
single sampling length
Lr corresponds to the cut-off λc.
Lr characterises the reference length for determining most parameters.
With the exception of Rt and Rm(c), the roughness parameters are
defined within a single sampling length. However, they are normally
calculated as an average of 5 single sampling lengths.
11.2.2.1 Filter λc (Cut Off)
The following graphic gives an overview of the selection of the profile
filter or the cut-off for different profile types. Proceed as follows:
First select the profile type (periodic/aperiodic). Then match the measured RSm value or the Ra or Rz value to one of the value ranges
listed in the table below. Follow the arrow and read the measuring
conditions in the centre table.
11-4
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Surface parameters
11.2.2.2 Noise filter λc/λs
The noise filter λc/λs (bandpass filter) must be switched on to filter
very short-wave vibrations out of the surface.
Tight digitalisation spacing increases the accuracy of the surface parameters (horizontal parameters, e.g., RPc).
Cut-offs
max. stylus
radius
max. digitalisation
spacing
λc [mm]
λs [µm]
λc/λs [-]
RSp max [µm]
[µm]
0.08
2.5
30
2
0.5
0.25
2.5
100
2
0.5
0.80
2.5
300
2 or 5
0.5
2.50
8.0
300
5
1.5
8.00
25.0
300
10
5
11.3Surface parameters
11.3.1 Group 1 (Pt, Wt, Rt, Rz, R3z, Ra, RPc)
11.3.1.1 Total height of the profile Pt, Wt, Rt
Using the tracing system, the profile of a surface is acquired in a
2-dimensional vertical section.
By profile filtering according to DIN EN ISO 11562 the following profiles are determined from the unfiltered primary profile (P profile):
•
Roughness profile (R profile)
•
Waviness profile (W profile)
Parameters are defined on these three profiles which are identified by
the respective capital letters P, R or W.
Following DIN EN ISO 4287 all parameters are valid for the roughness
profile as well as for the primary and waviness profiles.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
11-5
Roughness measuring
The centre line is the reference line for the definition of the parameters
within one reference length lp, lr, or lw. The evaluation length is the
sampling length used for the profile evaluation.
Unless stated otherwise, the roughness and waviness parameters are
determined over ln=5 lr or ln=5 lw.
Parameter
Pt, Wt, Rt
Designation
Total height of the profile
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
Sum of the roughness profile derived from the height of
the highest peak Zp and the lowest valley Zv within a
single evaluation length ln
This corresponds to the distance from the highest peak to
the lowest valley within the reference length ln.
Pt provides the evaluation of individual surface defects. Pt is the distance between two parallel demarcation lines which encompass the
unfiltered surface profile as tightly as possible within the reference
length lm.
The parameter Wt is used to monitor production processes where
waviness is a function criterion.
11.3.1.2 Maximum roughness profile height Rz
Parameter
Rz
Designation
Max. roughness profile height
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
Sum of the height of the highest profile peak Rp
and the depth of the deepest profile valley Rv of the
roughness profile within the single sampling length lr
As the vertical distance from the highest to the lowest profile point, Rz
is a measure of the range of roughness values in the profile, and
therefore a valuable aid in monitoring production. Nearly identical values indicate an extremely regular surface. Large differences indicate a
surface defect.
As Rz is generally determined as the mean of 5 single sampling
lengths lr of the roughness profile, it corresponds to the average peakto-valley height parameter according to DIN 4768.
11-6
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Surface parameters
Rp is equivalent to the height of the single highest peak above the
mean line previously defined in DIN 4762.
11.3.1.3 Basic roughness depth R3z
Parameter
R3z
Designation
Averaged middle peak-to-valley height
Standard
Daimler Benz- factory standard N31007
Definition
R3z is the arithmetic average of 5 single roughness
depths R3z1 to R3z5.
The single roughness depth R3z is defined as the vertical
distance between the third highest profile peak and the
third deepest profile valley within the individual sampling
length lr of the roughness profile.
The two highest peaks and lowest valleys are ignored.
Peak and valley are defined as unambiguous profile reversal points of a certain minimum size (height discrimination).
A vertical and a horizontal threshold must be set for measuring R3z.
R3z is not a standard parameter. It is one of the factory standards of
the Daimler Benz company. This parameter can only be evaluated
when there are at least three peaks and three valleys within each
sampling length.
11.3.1.4 Arithmetic mean roughness value Ra
Parameter
Ra
Designation
Arithmetic mean roughness value
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
Arithmetic mean of the sum of roughness profile
values
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
11-7
Roughness measuring
Statistically, Ra is the arithmetic mean of the deviations of the roughness profile about the centre line.
Ra is insensitive to extreme profile peaks and valleys and is primarily
used to monitor continuous changes of the surface possibly resulting
from tool wear.
11.3.1.5 Peak count RPc
RPc =
Peak count
ref. length (10mm)
Parameter
RPc
Designation
Peak count
Standard
STEEL-IRON test sheet (SEP 1940)
Definition
RPc is the number of profile irregularities per length unit of
the roughness profile which exceed a lower cut-off line C1
and an upper cut-off line C2 (C=height discriminations).
The distance between the two cut-off lines is parallel and
symmetrical to the centre line m.
The peak count is assessed over 10 mm irrespective of the sampling
length selected.
Pc is useful to the sheet metal industry as it describes the forming and
painting capabilities of rolled steel plating.
11.3.2 Group 2 (Rq, R∆q, Rsk, Rku, RSm, PSm,
WSm)
11.3.2.1 Root mean square roughness value Rq
11-8
Parameter
Rq
Designation
Root mean square roughness value
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
Root mean square value obtained from the ordinate values of the roughness profile
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Surface parameters
Representing as it does the root mean square deviation of roughness
values from the centre line, Rq corresponds to the standard deviation
of the profile values.
Consequently, the results are statistically much more representative
than those obtained using the Ra parameter.
11.3.2.2 Root mean square profile gradient R∆q
Parameter
R∆q
Designation
Root mean square profile gradient
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
Root mean square value of the local profile gradients
dZ(x)/dX of the roughness profile within the single sampling length lr
R∆q is a measure of the standard deviation of the profile angle. In
connection with Rq, R∆q says a lot about the functional behaviour of
the surfaces, e.g. in case of tribological stressing, light reflection or
galvanic coating.
11.3.2.3 Skewness Rsk
Parameter
Rsk
Designation
Skewness
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
A measure of the shape or symmetry of the amplitude
density curve of the roughness profile.
A plateau-like profile is indicated by a negative skewness value.
A normal distribution of profile values results in zero skewness.
Skewness values are greatly influenced by the individual extreme profile peaks and valleys.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
11-9
Roughness measuring
11.3.2.4 Steepness / curtosis Rku
Parameter
Rku
Designation
Steepness/ Curtosis
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
A measure of the steepness of the amplitude density
curve of the roughness profile.
The curtosis value of a roughness profile with a normal distribution of
profile values is Rku=3.
A profile with flattened peaks and valleys has Rku values <3.
Bei schärfer ausgeprägten Spitzen und Tälern im Rauhheitsprofil ist
der Wert Rku>3.
11.3.2.5 Mean spacing of profile irregularities RSm, PSm, WSm
Parameter
RSm (PSm, WSm)
Designation
Mean spacing of profile irregularities
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
RSm is the arithmetic mean of the width of profile
elements of the roughness profiles within the single
sampling length.
PSm and WSm are the corresponding parameters for the primary and
waviness profiles.
Thresholds must be set in order to determine the profile elements to
be evaluated and obtain reproducible results.
The thresholds C1 and C2 are normally symmetric about the centre
profile line at an equal distance above and below it. They can also be
defined as desired.
11-10
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Surface parameters
Example:
Upper height discrimination = 0
=> only valleys are counted (greater than the lower height discrimination)
11.3.3 Group 3 (material parameters)
11.3.3.1 Material ratio of the roughness profile Rmr (c)
Parameter
Rmr(c)
Designation
Roughness profile material ratio
Standard
DIN EN ISO 4287
Definition
Rmr is the percentage ratio of the sum of material-filled
lengths Ml(c) of the profile elements in a given cutting
height c to the sampling length ln.
The material ratio curve (Abbott curve) specifies the material ratio as a function of the cutting height c (measurement of the material ratio at different depths).
It is recommended to determine the material ratio at a cut-off line
height Rδc relative to the reference section height c0. The reference
section height is obtained by shifting the reference line down into the
profile to a defined material ratio.
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
11-11
Roughness measuring
11.3.3.2 Parameters of the material ratio curve Rk, Rpk, Rvk, Mr1,
Mr2
The material ratio curve determined from the filtered roughness profile
is divided into three profile segments which are characterised by parameters.
To do this a secant with a length of 40% of the ordinate (material ratio
Mr in %) is moved along this material ratio curve until it has the lowest
tilt and then extended.
As a result of this, the following parameters can be determined:
Parameters
Designation
Standard
Definition
Rk
Core
roughness
DIN EN
ISO
13565
Depth of the roughness core
profile (area with the greatest increase in material ratio over a
certain depth)
Rpk
Reduced
peak height
DIN EN
ISO
13565
Averaged height of the profile peaks
projecting from the core area
Rvk
Reduced
valley depth
DIN EN
ISO
13565
Averaged depth of the profile
valleys projecting into the material
from the core area
Mr1
Mr2
Material ratio
at both
edges of the
core roughness profile
DIN EN
ISO
13565
Mr is determined by the cut-off line
which limits the roughness core profile to the material free side.
A1
Peak area
A2
Valley area
DIN EN
ISO
13565
Rpk*
Height of
centres
Rvk*
Valley depth
DIN EN
ISO
13565
Distance between the highest bump
and the cut-off line of the material ratio Mr1
Distance between the cut-off line of
the material ratio Mr2 and the deepest profile valley
Rk is primarily used to evaluate the functionality of plateau-type areas.
The parameters Rk, Rpk, and Rvk enable the separate evaluation of
the core profile section, peak area, and valley area, as these each
have different meanings for the functioning of the surface.
11-12
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Troubleshooting
12 Troubleshooting / Maintenance
12.1Troubleshooting
Also observe the instructions in the description of the wavesystem
components!
Error
Possible cause
No display on
screen
•
Power
plugged
•
Mains switch off
•
Circuit-breakers
defective
•
Connecting cables between measuring station and PC are not
plugged or have come
loose
¾ Check all slots or plug
connections
to
the
measuring station components
•
Not all wavesystem
components are connected with each other
¾ Check
or
ensure
EMERGENCY STOP release
•
Wrong measuring program selected
¾ Select the appropriate
measuring program
•
Measuring station configuration set incorrectly
¾ Check and correct configuration in Setup menu
•
Workpiece not at right
position
Connected
system components not
detected
Untypical
measuring
results
cable
Remedy
un-
¾ Plug in power cable
¾ Switch on mains switch
•
Soiled workpiece
•
Probe has not been
correctly calibrated
¾ Replace circuit-breaker
¾ Switch on wavesystem
¾ Check workpiece position
¾ Clean the workpiece
¾ Calibrate the probe (see
the Adjustment menu)
¾ Replace probe
•
Probe damaged
•
Printer not switched on
(offline)
•
No connection between printer and PC
•
No paper
Probe value
does not
change
•
Probe stuck
•
Probe defective
Screen display
no longer responds to inputs
Software crash
Shut down PC, switch off
and reboot after waiting a
few seconds
Frequent program crashes
Hardware or software error
Notify HOMMEL Service
No output to
printer
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Attention!
¾ Switch on printer (online)
¾ Plug connecting cable
into relevant ports
¾ Insert paper
¾ Replace probe
TURBO WAVE V7.1
12-1
Troubleshooting / Maintenance
12.2Maintenance / Care
Observe the appropriate instructions in the later description for the
wavesystem components!
12-2
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Index
13 Index
Activate Create measuring
program .........................3-2
ADDIDATA ......................2-14
Adjustment ........................4-1
Adjustment run ................4-30
Adjustment window..........4-10
Align ................4-32, 5-8, 6-35
Align profile, partially .........5-8
Align, rough .....................4-32
Align, tilt unit....................4-32
Align, with wavetilt ...........4-33
Amplitude spectrum.........5-15
Analysis settings..............3-58
arc-error compensation ...10-3
Arithmetic mean roughness
value Ra.......................11-8
CNC commands
Activate adjustment window
................................. 9-11
Activate measurement
window...................... 9-12
Activate normal window 9-15
ADPS ........................... 9-10
Align............................. 9-14
Assign parameter file ... 9-16
Auto Stop ....................... 9-9
Change company header. 918
Change measuring
documentation .......... 9-17
Change measuring program
................................. 9-15
Check inputs ................ 9-20
Auto-dimensioning...........6-95
Check outputs.............. 9-20
Auto-evaluation ...............6-95
Delete measurement.... 9-19
Anchor function ............6-98
End ................................ 9-2
Delete...........................6-98
EndSub .......................... 9-4
Save.............................6-97
Export QS-Stat............. 9-19
Set anchor....................6-97
Extract.......................... 9-14
Start .............................6-97
GoSub............................ 9-4
Automatic probe arm control1015
Goto............................... 9-3
Autosave .......3-60, 4-37, 4-42
Autozero setup, wavelift ..4-28
Averaged middle peak-to-valley
height R3z....................11-7
Base cutting depth...........3-24
calibration stylus tip height10-5
Cancels a measuring run.4-38
Change measuring conditions
.....................................4-38
LabelSub........................ 9-4
LV reverse ..................... 9-7
Measuring direction...... 9-13
Message window.......... 9-15
Multiprint ...................... 9-21
Pause............................. 9-2
Position detection......... 9-22
Position, absolute........... 9-7
Position, relative............. 9-8
Checkboxes ....................1-11
Print ............................. 9-16
Closing a measuring program380, 4-44
Probe force .................. 9-13
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Profile evaluation ......... 9-22
TURBO WAVE V7.1
13-1
Index
Repeat step ................... 9-3
Rough alignment ......... 9-11
Select measuring station9-13
Set measuring conditions 912
Cut off filter......................3-34
Cut profile range..............6-38
Cut-off Lf .........................3-35
Show alignment value . 9-11
cut-off line level (n) ..........3-63
Signal tone .................... 9-3
Cut-off lines level.............5-10
Start measurement...... 9-12
Cut-off λc.........................11-3
Start topography
measurement ........... 9-22
Date.................................3-17
Stylus ............................ 9-9
Tolerance test conductor
measurement ........... 9-12
Topography settings.... 9-21
TRY ............................... 9-6
Waiting loop .................. 9-3
CNC editor........................ 9-1
CNC On............................ 9-1
CNC run
Defaults ...........................2-25
Delete measurements .....4-42
Delete text box .........5-7, 5-11
Deleting a measuring program
.....................................3-81
Depression surface: ........5-11
Determine parameters.......3-7
Discrimination height .......3-24
Display probe position .....4-20
Drop-down menus ...........1-11
Programming................. 9-2
Company header ............ 3-13
Show ........................... 3-15
Company header entries .. 3-7
Comparison segments
Define.......................... 6-76
Properties.................... 6-77
Compute areas ............... 5-10
Configuration of contour probe
...................................... 2-7
Control elements .............. 1-8
Edit menu ...................... 3-5
Form menu.................... 3-7
Measuring program menu3-4
Menu overview .............. 3-3
Options menu ................ 3-8
13-2
menu window .................4-9
Edit menu ........................6-26
Eliminating outliers ..........6-39
Evaluate profile..................5-2
Evaluation.................5-1, 6-23
Evaluation unit configuration2-2
Exit evaluation .................6-98
Exit Fourier synthesis ......5-22
Export profile to TURBO
CONTOUR ...................3-71
Export QS-STAT .............3-53
Extract .............................3-62
Extract over cut-off edges3-63
Extract partially.......3-63, 5-10
Extract range ...................5-10
Extraction criteria...............5-9
Extraction, automatic .........5-9
Profile menu ........... 3-4, 4-7
Extraction, evaluation range 364
Settings menu ............... 3-6
Extraction, not selected ...5-18
View menu..................... 3-7
Extraction, safety margin .3-64
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Index
Extractions, clear.............5-18
Fast positioning ...............4-25
Features and functions......1-5
File menu ........................6-25
Filter ................................3-34
Filter ..................................1-6
Fine fitting...............6-27, 6-32
Fit profile .........................6-95
fit ranges .........................6-75
Folder for measuring programs
.....................................2-25
Font – preset for new objects38
Form
Parameters ..................3-25
Form
Frame ..........................3-10
Statistics.......................3-52
Form identifier ........3-11, 3-15
Form removal ..................3-35
Function key bar Create
measuring program........ 3-3
Function key bar, general 1-10
Gain ................................ 10-5
Gothic arcs...................... 6-70
Grid ................................... 3-8
Hardware configuration ..... 1-3
Home offset............ 2-10, 2-13
I/O interface configuration2-14
Import / Export DXF ........ 6-40
Import company header3-6, 4-8
Import database .............. 1-13
Import measuring programs 112, 1-13, 1-16
Installing a linearity correction
file ................................ 10-7
Interface, rotary table ...... 2-13
invert profile .................... 3-59
Jog function..................... 4-19
Limit switch ..................... 4-25
Limit switch, wavecontour 4-26
Fourier analyse
Increase range .............5-20
Fourier analysis ...............5-13
Decrease amplitude .....5-20
Decrease range............5-20
Increase amplitude.......5-20
Scale logarithmically.....5-19
Fourier synthesis
Linear correction file2-20, 10-5
Linear traverse unit ....2-4, 2-6
Linear traverse unit
configuration .................. 2-4
Linearity error .................. 10-5
Load profile ....................... 5-2
Load the measuring program43
Exclusive areas ............5-14
Magnification ................... 3-46
Tapered function ..........5-14
Main menu ...................... 1-12
Frequency - dialog box ....3-45
Material area: .................. 5-11
Frequency range
Material evaluation .......... 5-12
Extract..........................5-17
Material ratio - dialog box 3-45
Suppress......................5-18
Maximum roughness profile
height Rz...................... 11-6
Full page layout ...............3-75
Function key bar
Main menu ...................1-12
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Mean spacing of profile
irregularities RSm ...... 11-11
Measure ............................ 4-1
TURBO WAVE V7.1
13-3
Index
Measured value statistics 3-47
Offset, wavelift.................4-29
Measured values, number3-35
Open measuring program..3-2
Measurement direction ... 3-59
Operating modes...............1-6
Measuring column
configuration.................. 2-5
Option buttons .................1-11
Measuring conditions - Settings
.................................... 3-31
Measuring conditions form3-40
Measuring documentation3-11,
3-59
Settings ....................... 3-11
Options..............................3-8
P profile .............................5-1
Page layout .....................3-75
Parameter list - dialog......3-48
Parameter list form ..........3-47
Parameters
Arithmetic mean roughness
value Ra....................11-8
Show ........................... 3-12
Measuring documentation
entries ........................... 3-7
Basic roughness depth R3z
..................................11-7
measuring program,
components................... 3-1
Mean spacing of profile
irregularities RSm ...11-11
Measuring range............. 3-37
Root mean square profile
gradient R∆q .............11-9
Measuring ranges............. 1-5
Measuring run start......... 4-36
Root mean square
roughness value Rq ..11-9
Measuring signal probe
adapter .......................... 2-5
Roughness profile height Rz
..................................11-6
Measuring station configuration.................. 2-1
Skewness Rsk............11-10
Menu bar ........................ 1-10
Menu overview Evaluation
window ........................ 6-25
Move axes ...................... 4-18
Multiprint ................ 3-76, 4-43
Delete measurement ... 3-79
Detail section............... 3-77
Pages >2 ..................... 3-78
Print position ........3-79, 4-44
Reset........................... 3-79
13-4
Steepness / Curtosis Rku1110
Parameters - Settings......3-20
Parameters file ................3-60
Parameters of the material
ratio curve Rk, Rpk, Rvk,
Mr1, Mr2.....................11-12
Parameters TURBO
CONTOUR ...................3-27
Parameters, Delete .........3-23
Rulers.......................... 3-77
Parameters, measurement
position.........................3-26
Setup........................... 3-76
Parameters, MOTIF.........3-23
Multiprint >=2.................. 4-10
Parameters, nominals......3-27
Multiprint Reset........ 3-9, 4-10
Parameters, PMICON......3-28
Multiprint_ >= 2................. 3-9
Parameters, Pmr .............3-23
Offset reference position 4-24
Parameters, Select ..........3-23
Offset waveline ................. 7-2
Parameters, Show...........3-23
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Index
Parameters, Tolerance
exceeded .....................3-27
Parameters, tolerance limits 327
Parameters, tolerances ...3-24
Password ........................2-24
Password ...............2-22, 2-23
Password prompt .....2-24, 3-3
Pneumatic lift.....................2-5
Positioning speed .....2-9, 2-12
Positioning the calibrating
sphere ........................10-19
Print........................5-13, 5-22
Printout form ................4-43
Screen form .................4-43
Print >= 2...........................3-9
Print >=2..........................4-10
Printer setup....................3-76
Printout form....................3-73
Printout form preview ......3-75
Printout form, accept elements
.....................................3-73
Probe
Add ..............................2-18
Delete........................... 2-19
Serial number...............2-17
Probe adapter ...................2-5
Probe arm .......................2-17
Add ..............................2-21
Delete...........................2-21
Mirror ........................... 6-36
Rotate .......................... 6-37
Shift ............................. 6-38
Shorten ........................ 6-39
Profile analysis
Extract............................ 5-4
Filter............................... 5-3
Profile analysis function key
bar ................................. 5-2
Profile comparison .......... 6-74
Enter tolerances........... 6-78
Fine fitting .................... 6-80
Save run ...................... 6-79
Start auto-evaluation .... 6-79
Profile comparison with DXF674
Profile diagrams .............. 3-40
Profile element ................ 11-3
Profile export, ASCII........ 4-40
Profile Export, QS-STAT . 4-39
Profile magnification........ 3-43
Profile offset ......4-35, 5-4, 5-7
Profile representation - Dialog
..................................... 3-42
Profile text ....................... 3-12
Program sequence
Fourier ......................... 5-14
Set topography............... 7-1
Program sequence (Settings)356
Probe arm data ...............2-21
Program workspace ........ 1-10
Probe configuration .........2-16
QS-STAT - averaging...... 3-55
Probe data.......................2-18
QS-STAT – Delete parameter
file ................................ 3-56
Probe lift, wavecontour ....2-14
Probe protection function.4-20
Probe type.......................2-17
QS-STAT - format ........... 3-55
QS-STAT - Settings ........ 3-55
Profile
Align.............................6-35
Fix ................................6-38
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
QS-STAT - Export ........... 3-56
QS-STAT path files ......... 3-55
Re-compute profile.......... 4-41
TURBO WAVE V7.1
13-5
Index
Reference position.......... 4-23
Set parameters................3-23
Reference run wavesystem 411
Set rulers.........................5-16
Reference speed ............ 2-13
Remote control configuration215
Remove form .................. 3-35
Remove tapered ............. 5-22
Resolution.................. 1-5, 2-9
Resolution, rotary table... 2-13
Reticle ..................... 5-6, 5-12
Root mean square profile
gradient R∆q ............... 11-9
Set text boxes....................5-7
Setting Fourier synthesis .3-64
Setting the polynomial fit .3-67
Settings menu .................6-27
Skewness Rsk...............11-10
Speed levels....................4-18
Sphere Gothic arcs..........6-71
Start contour profile export3-72
Start F5 ......................3-6, 4-8
Root mean square roughness
value Rq ...................... 11-9
Start Fourier analysis.......5-15
Rotary feed..................... 3-39
Rotary feed configuration 2-13
Start reference run manually413
Rotary table configuration2-11
Starting the program..........1-4
Rulers ............................... 5-6
Statistics............................1-5
Safety distance ............... 4-29
Statistics dialog box.........3-53
Safety margin ................. 5-10
Status bar........................1-10
Sampling distance, rotary table
.................................... 2-13
Steepness/ Curtosis Rku11-10
Sampling lengths lt,ln,lr... 11-3
Stroke monitoring ...3-59, 4-26
Save alignment angle ..... 4-34
stylus tip height................10-5
save company header .... 3-59
Stylus tip radius compensation
.....................................10-3
Save company header3-15, 316
13-6
Set Tapered ....................5-22
Start reference run ..........4-24
Step width..........................7-2
Suppress .........................5-18
Save measuring program 3-80
Surface roughness ..........11-1
Save profile..................... 4-37
Save settings ...................1-13
Switch on Fourier synthesis.514
Saving an evaluation ...... 6-99
Synchronous encoder........2-5
Saving the measuring
programs ..................... 3-80
Table of Parameters form3-49
Scale, Material ratio curve3-46
Tapered...........................5-21
Screen form...................... 1-8
Tapered, safety margin ...5-22
Screen layout.................... 1-8
Target position.................4-23
Select data source............1-13
Text boxes.......................1-11
Select mode.................... 1-13
Text object.......................3-16
Tabs ................................1-11
TURBO WAVE V7.1
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
Index
Tilt unit ..............................2-7
User languages ..........1-6, 1-7
Tilt unit configuration .........2-6
User rights......................... 1-7
Time ................................3-17
wavecontour, stroke monitoring
..................................... 4-26
Title bar .............................1-9
Topography .......................7-1
Adjustment .....................7-3
Delay..............................7-2
Number of measurements7-2
Perform measurement ...7-4
Positioning direction .......7-2
Positioning distance .......7-2
Start evaluation ..............7-4
Step width positioner ......7-2
Traverse.........................7-2
Topography settings........3-62
Trace angle .....................2-12
wavelift, starting speed.... 4-29
wavesystem ...................... 2-3
wavesystem, set devices. 4-21
wavetilt, save reference
position ........................ 4-35
X positioner configuration 2-10
Y positioner configuration.. 2-8
Zero line .......................... 3-24
Zero line material ratio..... 5-13
Zero offset.........2-5, 2-7, 2-13
Zero offset....................... 9-23
Zero offset, determine ..... 9-24
Travel ................................2-9
Zero offset, master coordinates ...................... 9-24
Traverse length ...............3-33
Zero position ................... 4-25
traverse speed.................3-34
TurboFile ................3-15, 3-16
Zeroing the residual probe
value ............................ 4-21
Unit....................................1-5
Zoom mode....................... 5-7
User interface....................1-8
HOMMELWERKE GMBH
TURBO WAVE V7.1
13-7
HOMMELWERKE GmbH
Alte Tuttlinger Straße 20 • D-78056 VS-Schwenningen
Phone +49 (0) 77 20 / 602-0 • Fax +49 (0) 77 20 / 602-123
e-mail: [email protected]
Internet : http://www.hommelwerke.de

turbo wave

Transcription

Similar documents

July, 1993 - Stumpf Welding Supplies

volumetric doser

Turbonetics Industrial Brochure Products

EUROPLAST – NYCAST GmbH Emergency

Yamaha Rhino 660 turbo intercooler

TTA # 1416_ - Turbo Buick Forum

Treadstone Performance Engineering

AirAce Helicopter Series zoopa 150 Turbo ForceBack 2.4 GHz

3M™ Dustmaster™ Powered Air Turbo Unit

Critical Thinking and Study Skills Blended Blueprint